T H E PRAK RIT GRA MM A R

“7 x T )

4L“ u—A v b u a s ; 00.

W I TH T HE COMMENT A RY (MA NORA M A’

) OF BHA’

MA HA .

F1 1 3“ OOIKZ’LETE 3 1 1 2220?OF T H E ORIG INAL T E X T , \VITH VARIOU S RE AD ING S F ROM A COL L ATION OF SI X M SS . IN T H E

B ODL E IAN L IBRARY AT OX F ORD , AND T H E L IBRAR IE S OF T H E ROYAL AS IATICSOC IE TY AND T H E E AST IND IA H OUS E .

”W IT

H NO'

EE A F E 24EL I SE T T A‘I SL A T T C

‘“

A ND IN DEX OF PRA K RIT WORDS ; T O WH ICH I S PREF I X E D A SH ORT INTRODUCTION

T O PRA K mT GRAMM A R .

P ROF E SSOR O F SAN SK RIT I N T H E UN IVE RSITY OF CAM B RIDGE .

S E C O N D I S S U E .

L O N D O N

HORA CE H A YMA N WI LSON,E SQ.

,M .A .

,

B OD EN PROF E SSOR O F SAN SK RIT I N T H E UN IVE R SITY OF OX F ORD ,

E T C ., E T C ., E T C .,

GRA TEFUL A CK NOWLEDGMEN T OF A LL TH A T H E OWES T O H IM,

AN OX F ORD PUPI L

INSCRIBES

T H I S V O L U M E .

A DVERT I SEMENT TO THE SECOND I SSUE .

I gladly avail m yself of the opportunity of a Second

I ssue of the Prakrita Prakasa to m ake one or two corrections.

I wish to cancel the rem arks,in p. vii. of the Preface

,

on the Péli Gram m ar of K achchayana and its identity with

the Prakrit Gram m ar of Vararuchi . My m istake was first

pointed out by Professor Weber in a very kind review of m y

edition in the Z eitschrift der Morgenlandisohen Gesellschaft,

in the volum e for 1 854. Mr. Jam es A lwis has lately pub

lished in Colom bo an edition and translation of the sixth

book of K achchayana’s Pali Gram m ar

,— the very work which

Mr. Turnour’s rem arks had led m e to believe was no longer

extant ; and I hope that the editor will give us the rem aining

seven books of the work.

T o the scanty testim onies which I was able to give in

m y Preface , p. vi ., in proof of the identity of Vararuchi and

K étyéyana , I can now add that of Sayana , who in his Preface

to the Rig Veda (Professor Mfiller’s ed ., vol . i ., p. 3 6

,2 )

expressly ascribes the Vérttikas on Panini to Vararuchi.

I have reprinted the first Sfitra of the fourth section,with

its com m entary.

E . B . C.

CAM BRIDGE ,January , 1 8 68 .

PRE F A CE .

PR i xRI r i s the general term , under which are com prised the various dialects

which appear to have arisen in I ndia out of the corruption of the Sanskrit,

during the centlfi ies im m edi ately preceding our era . Their investigation

offers m uch to interest both the philological and the historical student ; for

not onlv i s a knowledge of Prakrit (and especially of the principal dialect

usually understood by that nam e, ) essential to the explanation of m any form s

in the m odern languages of I ndia — supplying, as i t does, the connecting

link between these and the ancient Sanskrit— but, while thus throwing light

on the history of one branch of the I ndo-Germ anic fam ily of languages, it

affords m any valuable ill ustrations of those laws of euphony, with whose

effects we are ourselves fam il iar, in com paring the m odern I talian and Spanish

with the L atin out of which they sprang . A t the sam e tim e Prakrit is

closely connected with several deeply interesting historical questions . T he

sacred dialects of the Bauddhas and the Jainas are nothing else than

Prakrit, and the period and circum stances of its transfer to Ceylon and

Nepal are connected with the ri se and progress of that religion which is

professed by the principal nations to the north and east of H industan.

"r

When the Greeks, under A l exander, cam e in contact with India, Prakri t

seem s to have been the spoken dialect of the m ass of the people . T he

language of the rock-inscriptions of King A soka, which record the nam e

of A ntiochus and other Greek princes about 200R C , is also a form of

For instance, cf . the H industani i , 5 g}?

with the Pra‘krit form sin Vararuchi , ii.44. i. 9.

1“Professor \Vilson’

s H induDram a, I ntroduction, p . lxvi.

v i P RE F A CE .

Prz’

rkrit ; and sim ilarly we find i t on the bi-l ingual coins of the Greek Kings

of Bactria. I t also plays an im portant part in all the ancient H indu

dram as ; for while the heroes speak Sanskrit, the wom en and attendants

use various form s of Prakrit, the dialectical variations being m ore or less

regular and euphonious according to the rank of the speaker.

Vararuchi appears to have been the first Gram m arian who reduced these

popular dialects to a system ; and, if we m ay receive the H indutradition,

he was one of the nine gem s who flourished at the court of Vikram adi tya ,King of Oujein, whose great victory over the Sakw, as they pressed onward

towards I ndia after overrunning Bactria, BC . 5 6 , is the traditional epoch

from which the H in dus still date their Sam vat era. The chronology of

Sanskrit l iterature i s extrem ely uncertain ; but there are several circum

stances which, in this instance, tend to confirm the popular account,if we

m ay assum e, assettled, the identity of Vararuchi and K atyayana. F or thi s

identification, our chief authorities are the universal popular belief in I ndia,

and the direct testim ony of Som adeva, a native of Cashm ere in the twelfth

century . This author, in his encyclopaedia of legends, call ed the K atlzd

sa/m'

t-sdga/ra , collecte d from various sources, and com prising a large portion

of the m ythological lore of the H indus, expressly m entions them as the

sam e person, and uses e ither nam e indiscrim inatelyfi‘ F or the age of

K atyayana, we have som e independent testim ony, which, though not

precise, yet certainly throws hi s date far back into the past, and fixes it,

at the latest, as anteri or to our era . K atyayana has always been the

reputed author of the vartikas, or supplem ental rem arks on the ancient

Gram m ar of Panini ; and both nam es are found in the accoun ts of the

Chinese Buddhist H iuan-thsang, who travelled in I ndia in the first half

of the seventh century of our era . Panini is call ed Pho-ni-ni,and described

as the founder of m usic, which appears to be the nearest Chinese expression

5? See this point fully discussed in Professor Wilson’s Sanskrit Dictionary , I ntrod.

( first ed.) pp. vi. —xi.

P RE F A CE .

for a gram m arian ; the passage relating to K atyayana is as follows

T obi 7m p outi (erige par les Chinois) , lim ite (le l’

I nde duNord A u

sud-est de la grande ville, a 500h, m onastere de The m o soufa 7 m (forét

obscure) ; la a vécu ls docteur E z'

a to yan m 1 , 300ans apres le N irvana fMonastere fondé par A soka .

’The Buddhist traditions in Ceylon all agree

in call ing the author of the earliest Pali gram m ar K achchayanont and,

al though thi s is said to have perished , yet when we rem em ber how very

closely alli ed Pali is to Prakrit, and that K aehehayano is sim ply the Prakrit

form of K atyayana, there can be li ttle doubt that the Prakr it gram m ar of

the one and the Pali gram m ar of the other, are only the Brahm anical and

Buddhi st versions of the sam e tradition .

The foll owing work of Vararuchi or K atyayana is certainly our oldest

authority for Prakrit gram m ar ; and its rules are generally quoted by

later gram m arians and scholiasts as p ar excellence the(

Prakrita Sastra .

’

Other gramm arian s have generally followed its system , and contented

them selves with adding single rules, or al tering the arrangem ent of

its detail s . Much discrepancy exists between the Prakrit of the

gram m ari ans, and that which we find in the plays ; and i t is of

great im portance to have a com plete edition of the oldest gram m arian,that we m ay a scerta in, if possible, how far this discrepancy m ay

be a scribed to the m ul tipl ied errors of ignorant, and the unauthorised

corrections of learned, transcribers ; and how far it m ay have arisen from

a difference of tim e between the age of the poets and that of the

gram m arians, the dates of Sanskri t li terary history being so uncertain.

T he works of the two grea t gram m arians Panini and Vararuchi have

Quoted in the A ppendix (p. 382 ) to Remusat’s translation of the F oe koue lei, ouRelation des royaum es bouddhiques.” See also M . Julien

’

s H ist. de la vie de B ienenT hsang,

” pp. 102 , 165 .

1' T he com m on date of the Nirvcina of Buddha is R C. 543 ; but H iuan T hsang (asquoted in a note to p. 2 37 ) gives several different dates as current in I ndia in his tim e

,

the latest of which is about 360.I See Turnout’s Mahawanso,

”I ntrod. pp . 2 5

,2 7.

P RE F A CE .

been singularly different in their fate ; for while the form er has been

ever guarded with the m ost scrupulous care, and its Sd tras (or( conci se

revered with alm ost Masorethic attention to m inutiae, the

latter has been apparently left to all the vagaries of successive copyists

and editors. The MSS . often vary considerably, as indeed m ight be

expected in an ancient work, which has passed through so m any gene

rations of copyists, all of whom knew Sanskri t better than the dialect

whose pecul iarities the work explained ; but the m ost im portant variation

i s in the num ber of the Sutra s, som e MSS . containing m any which are

not found in the others ; and as no record appears to have been pre

served of the original num ber, i t is a question of som e difficul ty to decide

1n particular instances .

The MSS . which I have used in preparing this edition, are as

follows

(A .) No. 1 1 20in the E ast-I ndia H ouse L ibrary . A valuable MS ,

but frequently difficul t to read . 95

(B .) No. 2 1 1 in Professor Wil son’s collecti on in the Bodl eian L ibrary

at Oxford .

(C . ) No. 2 10in the sam e . Clearly written, but very inaccurate .

(D . ) No. 1 5 8 in the sam e .

if I t is this which Professor L assen used for the portions of Vararuchi published inhis I nstitutiones L inguae Pracriticae ”

(where he gave Sections i.— iv., x.— xii ., to which

we m ay add Sect. viii., as given from the sam e source in Dr.Delius RadicesH aving thus only one M S ,

and that not unfrequently very obscure in its writing, itwas im possible for him to avoid m any errors of transcription, . T hese have beencarefully pointed out in an article in the second volum e of Dr. Hofer

’s“Z eitschriftfil t dieWissenschaft d. Sprache.

”I have noticed the m ore im portant of them in the

notes to the text, but I h ave not been sorry to escape the unpleasing task of exposingthe unavoidable inaccuracies of one whom all O riental scholars m ust ever regard withaffectionate reverence ; Professor L assen’s“I nstitutiones ” have been of such continualservice to m e in the present work, that I feel bound to add m y little tribute of

adm iration at the skill with which , in spite of such inadequate m aterials, he has

accom plished his difficult task.

3 ’ ltE l’A C E .

(E ) No. 1 5 1 in the sam e . A clearly written MS . in the. Bengal i

character.

A beautifully written MS . in the Royal A sia tic Society’s

L ibrary , form erly belonging to M r. IVathen of Bom bay, for whom it was

prepared [p rakdi i by the Pandit Vishnu-Sarm an , and transcribed

by Bapu-Sarm an . Of th is I have u sed an accurate transcript on thinpaper, belonging to Dr. Max Mull er .

Of these MSS .,w e m ust at once separate W from the rest , as being

evidently a m odern recension . I t abounds with new rules [see A pp . A .,

p . 9 7 ] which are found in no other M S , and which in som e cases springfrom evident errors on the part of the editor [as in those num bered 1 2

and 2 3 in A pp . A] ; in others he seem s to have m et with two readings

in the MSS . and inserted both as separate rules [as e g . v . 1 6 (of note) ;vu. 2 3 ] in others he has interpolated Sutra s from other gram m arians .

W i s therefore of very li ttle value in a critical point of view, and though

I have consul t-cd it throughout, and given its variations where they seem ed

of im port ance, the whole has evidently been subj ected to such an entire

recasting [pm kdéékw mnam ] , that we can place little rel iance on its

various readings, unless supported by other authority .

A and C are (as I am persuaded) . copies from the sam e original MS ;

this was probably written in the Bengal i character, which would explain

m any of the extraordinary m istake s which the copyist of C has m ade from

ignorance of the character. A fter collating part of C,and finding it

useless from the absurd blunders of the copyist, and its evident identity with

A, where the genuine reading was preserved , I contented m yself with

sim ply referring to it in passages where A was doubtful . B is a MS .

which seem s to be com posed of two parts bound together, though both

are in the sam e writing ; the paging of the latter from the m iddle of

Section vii . has been altered to suit the form er. I n the earlier part it

generally agrees with A ,but in the latter, especially in Section viii . i t

b

P RE F A CE .

agrees rather with D ,and even seem s to borrow a few Sutra s from ‘

W.

D and E generally agree, the chief difference being that in the last five

Sections (and som etim es in the earlier ones) E continually gives only the

bare Sutra and its exam ples, om itting the explanation of the Com m entary ;and frequently om its even the exam ples too . I did not di scover E until

I had nearly finished m y col lation, but I have collated it for m ost of the

second half, and referred to it in all cases of difficul ty in the earl ier parts.

The text of the following edition has been m ade from a thorough

collation of the MSS . A BD (A being taken as the basis) , with the collateral

help of C and E ,which m ay be considered as respectively co-ordinate with A

and D ; W has been throughout consul ted, and its Variac L ectiones noted,where of any value, but always as of inferior authority . Where BDEW

agree in giving Sutras not found in A C, I have inserted them in brackets ;and in one instance, at the end o f Section v .

,I have sim ilarly inserted

som e from DEW, but their authenticity m ust be left for future decision.

The Sutras found in only one MS . beside W I have gi ven ln the notes ;the various spurious Sutras found only in W (nearly fifty in num ber)are given in A ppendix A .

Beside the above MSS . of Vararuchi , I have al so derived considerable

assistance from the works of other native gram m arians, as the Prakrita

Sanj i'

vani,and the gram m ars of K ram adiswara, H em achandra, etc.

1 . The only MS . of the Prakrita-SanJrvani’

,which I have m et with

(No. 1 503 -in the E ast I ndia H ouse L ibrary) i s im perfect at the com m ence

m ent, and is, unfortunately, very carelessly transcribed, and full of errors.

H ad it been accurate, i t would have been of great service, as i t seem s to

be a com m entary on Vararuchi’

s Sutras, which it generally gives in their

5“T hus DE alone quote the line from the Setubandha in the Com m . to iii. 5 2 .-For

our knowledge of this rare and ancient Prakrit poem we are indebted to Dr. H ofer’sinteresting article in his ‘

Z eitschrift,’ and we trust that, in spite of the corrupt state ofthe MS. which he m entions, he will yet give us an edition of the text. Such a workwould be indeed a boon to all Sanskrit scholars.

r 1: 1aF A c 111. xi

proper orde r, but in som e places with additions and alterations . T he

difficulty of deciphering the MS . has precluded m v m aking that use of

i t which I otherwise shoul d have done . T he work consists of nine 55

Sections , corresponding to the first n ine of Vararuchi . T he general in

scription at the close of each section is [ ti m eantara’

j a-wf'ra clz zfidydnz gird/ord a

sm y’

éranydm ,or

,as it is written at the close of the book , Prdkr zfta-sanj ivani

vr z’

ttau; the only notice which I have found of Vasantaraj a him self,

‘

is in

a passage from the Prakri ta-Sarvaswa , which state s tha t Markandeya , the

author of the la tter work, com m enced it after a previous study of the system s

of form er gram m ar ians,am ong whom he specifies Sakalya , Bharata, Kohala ,

Vararuchi,Bham aha , and Vasantaraya . T

2 . H em achandra was a gram m arian of the Jaina sect, who flourished

in the thirteenth century, and wrote a Prakri t Gram m ar as an eighth‘

A dhyay a’

after the seven ‘

A dhyayas’

of his Sanskrit Gram m ar. T he

final inscription is [ ty-delzd rg/a-3r i-H enm cizandm sele /m -I l em a

cirandra'

biziddnw-swop aj na etc.

This eighth A dhyaya consists of four Padas , with 2 7 1 , 2 1 7 , 1 80and 445

S i’

i tras respectively . IVe have first the Prakri ta -bhzi sha (or,

principal

in the first three pada s and half of the fourth ; the rem ainder

i s occupied with the Saura seni,Magadhi, Paifsachi, Chulika-Pai éachi, and

A pabhransa-bhasha. H em achandra

’

s opening Sfi tra i si

B afizclam ,

’

and the

ba/m ldd/zilcdm is supposed to continue to the end of the work , jt and to

explain any irregularities which m ay apparentlv contradict his rules,

if T he M S. num bers only eight, but the final inscription of the fifth is by m istakerepeated for that of the sixth , which has occasioned the error, cf . ff.43 , 5 3 .

”r a rwwursm s a at sfim m saeerra re

’

i : firs t-er zi

a rafi rara'

aarfm a fi gwe rsfiaa s tai rs-”

ii i first?an“lawm

a t nfiaavsi nréfi'a rs éi g z araneéwa HRn

A n instance of this occurs in a S i'

i tm quo te d in Appendix I ] , p . 19 7 .

x ii PRE F A CE .

especially in the Jaina writings,(

e lephant being his next S i’i tra. His

arrangem ent is frequently very different to that of Vararuchi , and in

m any cases his rules are quite independent . I have found two MSS .

containing the eighth A dhyaya by itself in the “Talker collection in the

Bodleian,both in the Devam

’

igari’ character.

[ ca ] (No. A very correctly written MS , but som e of the

characters are very peculiar, and in m any parts the writing of the last

l ines of the page i s blurred and illegible .

[ A ] (No. A less legible MS , but m ore easy of reference from

i ts having the Sutras of each pada num bered .

H em achandra’

s gram m ar is too independent of Vararuchi’

s to afford

m uch aid in ill ustrating the latter’s Sritras ; but m any of his rules are

very interesting , especially those on the Magadhi, an abstract of which

I have added at the end of the translation of Section xi . [of p . his

rule s for the Sauraseni are given in A ppendix C [of pp . 104— 106 ]som e im portant rules on the Sandhi of vowel s

,and the doubling of con

sonants,are inserted in A ppendix D and A ppendix E [of pp . 1 8 5

and I have frequently quoted his other rules in the notes to the

translation .

3 . Of the Prakrit gram m ar in the Sankshipta-sara of K ram adrswara,

which,as in H em achandra

,i s added at the end of the Sanskrit portion,

I have not succeeded in finding a copy (all the MSS . which I have con

sulted ending with the Sanskrit part) ; and I have therefore only used

the abridgem ent given by Professor L assen from the Pari s MS . in the

A ppendix to his ‘

I nstitutiones .

’

A s this work is of grea t value in

correcting Vararuchi’

s text, it i s with no sm all pleasure that I have seen

am ong the publications of the Bengal A siatic Society , which are announced

as in progress, an edition of the Pra’

rk i i t portion,by Babu R zij endralal

M ittra . Probably no other gram m ar could be of the use, which this

prom ises to be , in correcting and eluc idating Varuruchi as K ram adiswura

P RE F A CE . xiii

has followed his m ethod so m uch m ore closely than any other gram m arian,

whose works have com e under m y knowledge .

4. To the above I m ight add the Prakrita-Sarvaswa, by Markandeya

kavindra, of which there is a copy, bound up with Vararuchi , in the MS .

whi ch I have m arked D in m y collati on ; but unhappily it is so carelessly

transcribed that I have found it quite useless to consul t it . I m ay al so

m ention here that the com m entary on the 1 3 th canto of the Bhatt i-Kavya,which is so written as to be either Sanskri t or Prakrit, has not unfre

quently proved of som e service (ag . p . 1 3 6,note) ,

Such are the resources which I have had at m y com m and in preparingthe present edi tion of the Przikrita-Prak zisa , and so far as a careful collation

of the MSS . m ay help , I trust that som ething m ay really have been effected

towards a cri tical recension of the text . Several passages still rem ain

doubtful , and for these Vararuchi m ust wait for better MSS . or a m ore

com petent editor. T he various readings, which are added at the foot

of each page, will furnish the reader with the different corruptions or

alterations of the MSS . ; and i t is these which we m ust chiefly consul t

before we attem pt to interfere with the Si’i tras them selves, or to correct

them by the rules of later gram m arians, or the language of the poets in

the plays .

I n the present edition ,as the Sanskrit type required the use of an

inconveniently large siz e of E ngli sh type to fit with it in printing, I have

been obliged to m ake m y notes to the text as brief as possible, and have

generally reserved any explanatory deta il s or proposed em endations for

the notes to the translati on.

I n printing the Sanskrit text, and especially the com m entary, I have

ventured to relax the rules of Sandhi, wherever their strict observance

would have obscured the perspicuity of the rule, or would have m ixed

Prakri t words with Sanskri t ; as, whatever opinion m ay be held of the

propriety of printing purely Sanskri t works w ith such a relaxa tion of

PRE F A CE .

gram m atical niceties, the objections can hardly apply to a Sanskrit-l ’rz’rki i t

work like the present, where two languages are continually interm ingled ,one of which by its very nature repudiates Sandhi al together. I have

al so throughout followed the MSS. inwriting a as the I’rz’

rkrit equivalent

for the Sanskrit H ; in the continental editions of the plays i t has been

usual to write a ,but for this there is no authorityfi

"as the MSS . m ake

no difference between the a the Sanskrit and tha t the Sanskri t

a. The rules of Vararuchi evidently show that there was no distinction

whatever between 6 and thus in ii . 2 , and iii . 1 , we have only one of

them introduced, and yet it m anifestly is intended to include both ; and

again in iv. 2 1 , the prepositions ap a and am both becom e 0, which would

im ply that their Prakrit form s previou s to contracti on were identical . I t

i s not so easy to determ ine which of the two sounds thus absorbed the

other, and whether in translation we shoul d represent it by b or a

universal ly ; the anal ogy of the m odern languages woul d incline us to

the form er, but a Sutra in H em achandra given which is the only

passage in which I have seen the subject alluded to , seem s to favour the

latter, which I have therefore adopted throughout .

Where I have occasionall y quoted from the Prakrit of the plays to

illustrate pecul iar rules,m y references have been m ade to the usual

editions, except in Sakuntala,

’ where I have generally quoted from the

excell ent edition lately published by Professor Will iam s,though I have

added references to tha t of Dr . Boehtlingk .

I n the E nglish translation,I have endeavoured to follow the plan

which Dr. Ballantyne has adopted in his edition of the L aghu K aum udi’

.

A ll the peculiar features of the H indusystem are retained,while at the

5“Of .Dr. T rithen’

s rem arks in the preface to his ed ition of the M ahaviracharita.

r ni t a : u m rwrwrégawrari éw ah Rafa I I s ierra“a m

—es u we re : u

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

CONT E NT S.

PAGE .

I ntroduction to Prakrit Gram m ar xvii

The Prakrita-Praka sa (Sanskrit text)

A ppendix A ( spurious Si'

rtras)

A ppendix B (on Var. iv. 2 5 )

A pp endix C (Hem achandra’

s Sutras on the Sauraseni’ dial ect)

T he E ngli sh Translation

A ppendix D (on Var . iii . 5 8 )

A ppendix E (Hem achandra’s Sr

'

i tras on vowel s Sandhi )

I ndex of Prakrit words

A SHORT

I N T R O D U C T I O N

P R A K R I T G R A M M A R .

PRI K RI T’

(as has been already observed)( is the com m on nam e given to the

various dialects which sprang up in early tim es in I ndia,from the cor

ruption of the Sanskrit ; and,as the word is used by the gram m arians

,it

signifies‘derived, ’ thereby to denote its connection with the original Sans

krit . Thus, Hem achandra defines it sanskrz’

tam , tatm-b/mvam

T he later gram m arians include m anytam dyatam ed

varieties under the nam e, but m ost of these are probably the subtil refine

m ents of a later age ; as, the older the gram m arian i s, the fewer we find

the dialects to be ; and the oldest, Vararuchi , has only treated of four— the

Maharashtri, the Paisachi, the Magadhi , and the Saurasen i’. Of these thefirst is considered by him as the m ost im portant, and it is this which Professor L assen has treated as his dialectus prmcipua.

’I ts gram m ar is given

in the first nine sections of the ‘

Prakri ta the rem aining threesections being severally devoted to the pecul iarities of the other threedialects .A s the m ethod of H indugram m arians l is very different from that with

which we are fam iliar in E urope , i t has been thought that the following

A ll the rules of H indugram m arians are given in the form of conciseaphorism s (entree) , which hang together as on a thread (whence the nam e) ,so that frequently a rule contains one or m ore words which have to besuppl ied in those which follow it, to com plete their sense. T he aphorism sthem selves are expressed as briefly as possible, and to facilitate this thefoll owing abbreviations are resorted to — A word in the genitive case i s

xvii i IN T ROD UCT ION T O

short abstract of Prakrit Gram m ar in a m ore m odern form m ight not bewithout its use to the student as an introduction to the original ; while, atthe sam e tim e

,it is hoped that it will give a sufficient view of the language

and its peculiarities to enable any reader of Sanskrit readily to understandthe Prakrit passages, which form so large a portion of all H induplays .Prakrit alm ost always uses the Sanskri t roots ; i ts influence being

chiefly restricted to al terations and el isions of certain letters in the originalword . I t everywhere substitutes a slurred and indistinct pronunciation forthe clear and definite u tterance of the older tongue ; and continually affectsa concurrence of vowel s, such as i s utterly repugnant to the geniu s of

the Sanskrit . I n the following abstract we shall first treat of the changeswhich it effects in the letters of the words ; and then those which iteffects in their declension or conjugation.

SECT I ON I .

1 . Vowels. (Var. i .)Prakri t retains all the Sanskrit vowel s except rt (rt, hra

'

, M ) a t and an.

R ?! initial , and with no consonant preceding it, becom es re', and som e

tim es even when a consonant does precede, this consonant being thenel ided [Van i . 30, E l also frequently becom es a, z

'

, or a (especiallywhen preceded by a consonant) . F or exam ples, cf. Var. i . 2 7— 2 9 . [For

lre'

, of. i .A t becom es e or az , rarely z

'

or i ( i . 3 5A ll becom es0or an, and som etim es a ( i .41Of the rem aining vowels, e and 0are no longer diphthongs, and m ay

be long or short as to their quantity (cf. Will iam s’ Sakuntala, p . 2 2 8,note) .

generally governed by ethane understood instead of such a word or letteranother is to be used) ; a word in the ablative by p aram after such aword or letter, etc .) a word in the instrum ental by saha together with

such,

a word in the locative is som etim es used in its proper sense ( as ,

in Van ,i . but m ore com m only it is used as a locative absolute

,with

p are understood when such a worrl or letter follows, the rule refers to thatwhich im m ediately precedes it, of. Panini, i . 1 , I

'

d signifies‘

optionf

Panini adopts m any m ore, but these will sufi ce for Vararuchi .

r R A

'

K R I r G RA MM A R .

Vararuchi in Section i . gives various directions for the changes of theother vowels, but these are rather confined to certain words

,than expressive

of general rules . Professor L assen ( I nst . pp . 1 3 9— 144) has laid -downas a general principle that before two consonants a long rowel is shortened ;

1

that is, a’

,i,and a becom e severally a

,t, and a (e and 0

,be ing com m on

,

m ay rem ain) as,m agga for m a

’

rga ; (leggha for dirgha ; p a rra for p hrra .

Subsidiary to this, are the two following rules : [ ca ] I f the long vowel isretained, one of the consonants is el ided, as isara or e

'

ssara for ééwam

[ h ] A short vowel before two consonants is occasionally lengthened, and

one of the consonants om itted, as j iha for j lhwd . E and 0being favouritevowels in Prakr it, l and a before a conjunct are very frequently changedto these (of. Var. i . 1 2 , in som e words an initial a becom es a (cf. i .

for purusha ,‘

a m an,

’we have the anom alous p are

’

sa ( i . IVO

m ay here m ention the anom alous m etta enri tra,which

,though not in

Vararuchi , frequently occurs in the plays [cg Sak ., William s’, p . 1 8 3

,

2 . S ingle Consonants . (Var. ii . )[ a .] Prakrit has no palatal or cerebral sibilant ( ii . n is everywhere

changed to n, unl ess it be followed by a dental consonant ; and an initialg becom es j ; with these exceptions , initia l single consonants generallyrem ain unchanged . [N B IVhen a preposition or other particle i s prefixedthe letter ceases to be

‘ini tial ’

; cf. Com m ., ii. 2 , on saurz

’

so] “We find

a few exceptions, as am for p anah, etc . in the plays,but these are not

recognised in Vararuchi ; cf. al so Var. ii . 3 2 — 41 .

[6] F inal single consonants are dropped, except on,

and som etim esn,which becom e anuswara [iv. 6 , T he final s of nouns often assum e

a or d, and so cease to be final ( iv . 7

M edial single consonants .I f, g, ch, j , t, (l , p ,

h,c , g (by i i . m ay be optionally elided or retained ;

but t and p , when not el ided , generally pass into (l and o2

( ii . 7 , and

the elision of g (though not so given by Vararuehi) i s probably absolute ;see L assen, Sect . 45 . T he preposition p ratz

' i s always written p arlt ; see

note,p . 1 1 6 .

IV becom es n t becom es ( l ; (l often becom es l ( ii . 20,

This principle does not seem to be given in Vararuchi , but of.

A ppendix D ,p . 1 8 5 .

2 Or 6,as it is often printed ; on this . see Pre face , sup ra , p . xiv .

X X I NTRODUCT I ON T O

E h, gh, th, dh, bh (11 . 2 7) m ay rem ain unchanged, but generally becom eh (when th is not so changed, it becom es dh, especially in the prose, 1 or

Sauraseni di alect, cf. xii . ehh, j h, dh rem ain unchanged ; th alwaysbecom es gilt ; ph usually rem ains unchanged, but m ay becom e bh ( ii . 2 6 ;of. L assen, p .

i

R often becom es l ( ii . this is universal in the Magadhi'

and the

inferior dialects. N, m ,

l, s, h rem ain unchanged. S and sh becom e 8 (in

som e words 5; becom es h, of. ii. F or exam ples, see Var. ii .3 . Conjunct Consonants (Var. iii .)I t is in these that the Prakri t changes are m ost m anifest ; and, as several

distinct Sanskri t com binations are often m erged into one Prakrit form ,it is

som etim es not easy to recognise the original word in its disguise. Prakri tavoids a union of two consonants of different classes, and everywhere endeaveurs to reduce them to the sam e ; this it generally effects by eliding one or

the other ( iii. 1 and then doubling the rem aining one ( iii . 50, 5 1 ) butthere are several exceptions in the various individual com binations. One

rule m ay be observed, viz .,wherever a conjunct involve s a sibilant, the s is

represented by the aspirate of the accom panying letter ; as in lclch for slc,shlc,

or lash (iii . 2 9 ) or by h, if the other letter has no aspirate,as nh for ehn ( iii .

When r is involved in a conjunct, it som etim es passes into anuswara,as ansu for asrn ; and the sam e also appl ies

,but rarely, to v and s ; of. Var.

iv. 1 5 . I n som e cases a new vowel i s inserted between the letters of theconjunct

, as hart’

se for ha/rsho ; for this, see Var. i ii . 59— 66 .

TA BLE or PRAK RI T oonnnvcrs.

The following table will show at a glance the various Sanskri t com binations which each Prakrit one represents. A s given there they properly referto those in the m iddle of a word ; but, by dropping the fir st letter, they willequally apply to those at the beginning ; thus, lclch hsh when m edial , as

1 The Maharashtri dialect is m ore pecul iarly used in poetry, as we infer,not m erely from the usage of the plays, but also from such expressions ofBham aha

’

s, as‘

erz’

tta-bhanga-bhwa,

’in iv. 1 6

, and his reference to the

gdthdh in ix . 4. Cf. L assen , pp . 3 70— 3 78 , who al so quotes from the

Séhitya-darpana ,

‘

noble wom en should properly speak the Sauraseni, butin their songs (gdthdh ) they m ust use the Maharashtri .

’

PRA K R I T c RA MM A R . xxi

j ahlcha for yaksha , but hh Icsh when ini tial, as hhada for kshata ; sim ilarly,

pp pr , m edi al , but p p r, initial .

Hi - 1

m 1 a l ibi“? fi t'

flf ifll’ fi m fi i,

2 9. 1 .

m 3 , g ,iii . 1 . iii . a 11 , vi. a t i ii . 3 .

1 5; g“, 3 ,

iii. 1 . a , a ,iii . 2

,3 .

g:

it of hi .

g 3 1 , iii . 2 . a ,iii . 2 7 .

“a , i

i

iii . 3 .

q z m ,iii . 2 7 .

“(g

1g , g ,

”

iii .40.a

“a ,i ii . 3 . a ( som e tim e s ) , i ii . 5 . a , a}, a ,

3 .

g] , iii . 2 7 . 15, iii . 1 7 . m ( e .g. sejia’

for sag/yd , iii .

a ia , a . iii . 2 8 .

a a , 7a, ( a ( som etim e s ) , x11 . 7 ( 3m m )“i f, x . 9 (P a ts )

g fi,iii . 2 2 T

rT ( once ) , iii . 2 3 .

g"

5 3111. 10. 3 ,

iii. 1 . Q , 131 ( rare ) , 11 1 1 1 . v . 2 3 .

viii . 2 5 , 2 6 .

H let is som etim es found in the plays ; as, m nlclca m nhta . See

Stenz ler’

s note on H rich .,p . 2 9 , l . 20.

2 R io shlc, sh,only in a com pound word ; as, tz

'

m hhdm titres/a im

(cf. L assen, p . 2 64) in all other cases it should be hlch. T he sam e holds ofchch 30h.

3 Chehh shth, very rarely ; e.g., p adz'

chehhz'

cln p ratz’

shthz’

ta , Sakuntala (Will iam s’ edition) , p . 1 5 3 , 1 cf. L assen, p . 2 6 6 .

4Jh seem s to stand for hsh in such words as j hina hshina (Lassen, p .but of. viii . 3 7 .

II

xxii I NTRODUCT I ON T o

“g fit, a

s

( rare ) , i ii . 2 5 , 2 6 .

g air, iii . 2 . is( rare ) , v ii i .44.“g ,

“g 7a, 7 ; ( once ) , i ii .45 , 46 .

q 37, i ii . l .

“i f, 151 , i ii .44. i i . ( a, sq, i ii . 2 .

qt, g ,iii . 3 . a ,

i ii . 3,w i th i i .42 .

ng fig ,vg ,

cm,

“a , $5 ( is ) . iii . 33 ; of . i ii . 8 .

a“

a , g ,i ii. l . a , m ,

111 2 .

“a , a ,

iii. 3 . F}, iii . 3 , 24.

a an, 12 1, i ii . 1 . 3 ) vi . 2 . i ii . 3 . a ,i ii . 1 2 .

131 , iii . 1 .

g: m g ,iii . g ,

iii . 2 . gi g ,i ii . 3 ( g m ay

rem ain unchanged, iii.

g m , 3 ,iii . 1 , 3 . i f, sq, iii . 3 .

7 k? 73 ( Sewn ,

cf . H ema-ch. 2 6 1,A pp . C

a 3 ; ( once ) , iii . 34.

tn aiq, m ,iii . 1 . iii . 2 . g , If, a ] , g ,

ii i. 3 . z . W ,

11 i .49 . a: ( once iii .

11 5 aim , 3 35, 1555 zq a ,iii . 1 . 131 , i ii . 3 5

,3 6 .

“a 1 3 ,

“g a , 3 ,

iii . 1 . if,“3 ,i ii . 3 .

a; “L g:3 ,iii . 1 . as}, iii . 2 . a , 35, i ii. 3 . 3;

( once ) , iii . 47.

W a (011 thi s rare change , of . no te tran sl . iii .

a; ( g , g r) , sq, iii .43 . 7a,i ii . 2 . if, a}, i ii . 3 . [va

becom es fiqa cf . iii . 6 2 ]

A s in the adverbial term inations ; i .e .,ettha atm .

2 Pp sp ,only in a com pound word (cf. note sup ra , on M ) , see

L assen, p . 2 64.

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

I NT RODUIZT I ON T O

term ination in am or dm (cf. Vararuchi, v. 3 1 nouns of relationshipadm it also a nom inative singular in d ; and m dtrz

’

,thus becom ing m a

’

d,i s

decl ined l ike a fem inine noun of the first declension (Vararuchi , v. 3 2 ,Nouns ending in a consonant (cf. Vararuchi , iv. 6— 1 1 , 1 8 ) either drop theirfinal letter, and so fall under one of the first three declensions (when, ifneuter, they generally becom e m asculine) , as 8am for sa me ; or add an a (or

ti if fem inine) to the t base, as dsz’

sci dries. This, however, chiefly appliesto those cases whose term inations begin w ith consonants, these expedientsbeing adopted to avoid the necessity of changing the conjunct, which them eeting consonants would produce ; in those cases whose term inations beginw ith vowels, the Sanskri t form is generally retained, m odified by the usualPrakrit laws ; as, bha/vadd ( instr. of bhavat) , dnsd for dynshd (instr. of dyus) .See Lassen, p . 2 98 .

Prakrit has no dual num ber nor dative case ( substi tuting the genitive forthe latter) but it has two term inations of the ablative plural— htnto, whichsignifies

‘

from ’ in a causa l, and sunto, which signifies‘

from ’in a local,

sense . The following schem e will give the vari ous form s of the first threedeclensions, which are by far the m ost im portant. A s noun s in n are decl ined,mnta tz

'

s mntanclls, like those in i, no exam ple of these is needed.

DE CLENSI ON OF NOUNS .

W 5 3 m asc. (neut . am 3 a ) .

SI NGULA R. PLURA L.N om . aa} ( ne ut. awl ) afi r ( neut aqlrg

‘

amrffir,

xii .

A ce. 3 3 ? afi‘

; sa w( v . 1 1 ; cf . no te,

trans .) (neut. nom .)

W W

3 3 716 3ala rms fi t

a? fi rm

afi ( neut . am )

sa fari}aé s‘

é‘r

Ela m? m

3 3 33 -

s’

am ( neut . am ?

PRAK R I T G RA MMA R . xxv

“afa r wfi; m as c .

SI NGULA R.

( neut. ( f? ) w? i t)

a ln -'

g’

( neut . ( f? ) ( 11 ° {3332“3 3

m m m i n fem

SI NGULA R.N om .

We m ay observe here that fem inine nouns in z

'

and i are not distinguished

in Prakri t inflexion ; and the sam e holds of those in uand 72 .

( neut . gr? ( fl) .

PLURA L.

wri t-

ih a rm s?) ( 11

wfim fi ;

wfi f‘

s‘

PLURA L .

m a rsh 3 ; m a r

p .

m arsh <5“

m a fi a) 436 )

I NTRODU CT I ON T O

( rig: aft fem .

SI NGULA R. PLURA L.

wi sh a ; mi: (? L ass o p

307,note

J im)

mi fi’ f?!

mitt?m

("i s a-3

SECT I ON I I I . PRONOUNS (VA R . VI .)

T he Prakrit p ronouns follow the infiexions of nouns, but add som e

pecul iar form s of their own . The accom panying schem e of declension,as

appl ied to j et ya, contains, i t is hoped, all the form s which are reallyuseful to the student .A s a final consonant is always rejected in Prakrit

,som e of the pronom inal

bases are changed from their Sanskri t form s before the ease-affixes are subj oined ; thu s, lcz

'

m , yaa’

, lacl , becom e severally Isa, j a, and la ; etacl becom es

ecla,and som etim es 3 (Var. vi . {dam becom es t'm a ; atlas becom es m m

(and som etim es aha , vi . 1 6m , g/ad, tad, have al so a second form in i , as

In,j e'

,ti which, though generally restricted to the fem inine, still furnishes

som e form s to the instrum ental and genitive singular of the m ascul ine and

neuter. Prakrit, in fact, appears to have used the pronom inal form s wi thgreat laxity ; thus we find the proper m ascul ine form of the locative (asz

’

m assz’

m ) frequently u sed for the fem inine, as in éakuntala (Will iam s’

edition) , pp . 3 6 , 2 ; 1 1 5 , 3 .

\Ve m ay here add a few peculiar form s which Vararuchi notices ; such asto and etto for tasm dt and otasm dt (vi . 10, 20) so for tasg/a or tasg/dlz (vi .

m for teslzdm or tofsdm ; ai m for the nom inative singular of atlas, beingapparently used for the three genders . N am ,

though not given in Vararuchi,i s frequently found in the plays for07m m and encim . F or [Jig/at, ta

’

vat, etc .,

we have (by iv . 2 5 ) the form s l 'erldo/xa , l 'ctlm, tmlo’alza

,tel l ia

,etc.

P RhK R I T GR A MMA R . xxvii

“51

“q(Ma sc . ) IVho .

’

S I NGULA R. PLURA L .

a

.

) ( 3 31 n eut . ) ( 3 1133 ne ut.)“i i

an farm

a ? ) $3,l

a i rga s ; a re

“and as

F em inine .

S INGULA R . PLURA L .

N om . a n

law) “3

A ce . a

A bl . a re?) a Tfi fi} ‘

Efi T F ie

lfifi'

fil

I n str. fawn E IT% E li-

If?s w am

-

st ;Gen . 37g ”mm ( a rm afis ; aura arm m

s h sfm t sits

“ai m m 3t

N a) ? fa rL oc Gus s wa n ans 1 ! aim 43

The personal pronouns are given in Vararuchi,vi . 2 5— 5 3 . I have

enclosed in brackets these form s which probably never occur in the plays .

The plurals are regularly form ed from new bases ; as tag/7 m, tum l m, tum m a,9o n o p z y Aam iza

,and

,1 11 som e cases

,m ay /m (of. H industani and

W'

e find also a neuter genitive Lisa, used in the sense of why .

” in

the plays .2 H em achandra gives these first two form s . F or j dsz

’

m ,of. vi .4, var. lect .

xxviii I NTRODUCT I ON T O

W iT hou .’

SI NGULA R. PLURA L.

N om as ( a ) as? as

A cc (a re an ass s is aI n str. ( as ) as

“am : a?! “i f? a s nfifié

( am ? ) if F?A bl . ‘

r'

fi fi'

( ar-Fir and ) g a s

fs

Gen omwTM fi ass as:We 53 Frans?wa s?

3 i“

am : at?) Ra ff'

s Ri g W313

9

wmg I .

SINGULA R. PLURA L.

N M 1 13?( i?3 13 95

A ce . t i m i ( S teffi?)

Instr. aan ( a t W )

A bl . a? ) ( Wfi fi ant-

{i

3 fs )

Gen .

33}

“an 113 3 113

L oc 11310111 ) m afia

For the num erals, séoVararuchi,

I n éak. Will iam s’, p . 2 30, l . 1 , we find a nom . tum ; of. Var. vi . 2 6 , v.l .

2 I n the plays m ore generally tue.

I n the plays m ore generally tuz'

.

(W in prose,x1 1 . 2 5 )

W'

s“Fr i t ?)first

”

?

W fi rfi

W WW) ans new

Vi . 54— 59 .

PRK K R I T G RA MM A R .

SECTI ON I V.— VERBS .

Prakri t has properly only one conjugation the first in Sanskrit) ,though fragm ents of form s belonging to other conjugations frequently occurin the plays . The m iddle voice is very seldom used, and m ost m iddl e verbsare conjugated actively. There is no dual num ber, as has been alreadynoticed in noun s .

The only tenses of the active voice which rem ain seem to be the present ,the second future, and the im perative . Below we have given the verb72a m, adding in brackets these form s which , though not in Vararuchi, occurin H em achandra, the Sanksh. Szi ra, and the plays (of. L assen) .

Present.

SI NGULA R. PLURA L.

1 . ( s sh? )

1

3 . am? a s

The m iddle voice has a secondor salute.

Im eratz’

ve.

SI NGULA R, PLURA L.

3 8 5 (Van v u 1 8 ) 1 . w ar-“

a 41 (s ass )

m (s erfs as sa fe) 2 .

“as s ( s ire:

I t shoul d be added that, instead of a, 6 m ay be optionally used before any

1 On the absence of this form in Vararuchi , L assen has a rem ark (p . 202 )which it is im portant for the student of Vararuehi to bear in m ind

, vi z .,

Consulto pom a gram m atrcrs form as m om m a culgwres ; a poetl s contra provario dicendi generc diversis locis altcrutras praeoptari .’

1 3 13m) 4341 sfi m’

ra : 41

41 fl a s )

2 . m ( in prose m 45)

vfirczn (W )

3 “s tirs

and third person singular, as whose, sakade

X X X I NTRODU CT I ON T O

personal affix (vu. as hasem i, etc., hasedu, etc.

,or

,in other words, as o

is only an contracted, Prakri t allows the verbs to im itate partially the tenthconjugation in Sanskri t .

T he future has several form s in Prakrit.

[ a ] That m ost in use has the following term inationsS ingul ar 1 . Q Q rfiq. 2 .

”

(rift fi fe:

Plural 1 . Q nfi . 2 . ( get, $ 3 3 . ( Effi

These are added to the root with the augm ent i, as haszssam ,etc . T he 88 is,

of course, only the Rrakrit form of the Sanskrit sy .

[ b] A second form gives the anom alous olzclzk for the characteri stic 88 ofthe future, as sookehham or soolwlzl n

'

ssam,from m ; ooel wlzham or oochokhz

’

ssam ,

from each (of. Van , vii . 1 6 ,

[ a] A third form changes the 88a to M,as in etc. We have

also such form s of the first person singular and plural as hasiham a'

and

hasifidm o. (Note also such form s as kaltam , ddkam , from km"

and dd ; Var.,

vii .

[F or the very rare form s w ith the inserted jja and flat,in Van , vu. 20

2 2 ; as also for the rare preterite in ta and Ma , in Var.,vii . 2 3 — 24; See

L assen’s I nst., pp . 3 5 3— 3 5 8 ]The Prakrit passive (vii . 8 , 9 ) uses the active term inations ; but, for the

characteristic y , it prefixes ia or ma as p arliz ia‘

z‘

or p aelleg'

jj a‘

z'

for p a lm/ate.

Occasionally the y of the Sanskrit form i s retained , in which case i t is ofcourse assim ilated to the preceding consonant, as gam m a

'

z’

for gamyate ;

or m ore com m only disa'

z’

,for clm

'

éyate (of. also viii . 5 7 ,There are two form s of the causal ; one in which ay, the Sanskrit addition

to the root, becom es e, as karec’a’

from [cam lcm'

(an a in the first syllableof the root becom ing a by Var. vii . 2 6 ) the other in which doe ( doe ?)is added ; as lcdrdoeclz

’

or lcardvedz'

(the a of the first syllable being onl yoptionally lengthened , vii . 2 7 ; of. note,

T he infin itive ends in tam ,if a consonant precedes (which is of course

assim ilated ) ; and clam , if a vowel precedes ; as aa l lam ,from each ; nedam ,

from M ; the latter being the favourite form , an i or e is often insertedafter a final consonant to produce i t ; the cl i s also often el ided, as leaseum or

hasz’

am, from lza s.

T he indecl inable participle in twd becom es tana or ana,as M irna

,from

loci ltrz'

; that in ya becom es ab , and i s usually the only form found in

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

CORRECTI ONS A ND A DDI TI ONS .

P.-14

,l . 7 , on som dlo add as a note, So read A BCDE , Hem ach.,

and

the Prak. Sanj . W has saam dlo ; of. note transl . p .

P . 1 9 , add to note 3 , the Prak . Sanj . reads Sut. 1 7 , as in text.’

P . 24, note 5 , read B nah ; DE ntizak.

’

P. 30, last l ine, add, ‘

for this S li t . and its corrupt Com m .,of. note transl .

pp. 1 3 5 , 1 3 6 3

P. 1 1,read Sfit. 3 , we? S?!

P.49 , note 1 , add to W’

s var. lect. (after 88d ityddeéaa m i bizavatah ;

id-ed-ad-dtaéoha bizavantz'

; insect, icise, iciz'

(Cod. icii) , ieie, icia, kid and

sim ilarly j z'

ssci, etc., tz'

ssa’

,etc. Then follows nasgra izanena, etc. as in note.

P. 6 1 , l . 2 , W’s var. lect. accidentally om itted ; W for

‘

nz’

tydrtizam

C 0

vwesizanam ,

’has nzyam drtham oaoizanam .

’

P. 1 1 1 . A dd as a note to i . 24,‘

The Prak. Sanj . reads thi s Sutra

Ud an m aeliiaicddlsiza , and em ploys it to explain the shortening of a before

a conjunct, as cli mtta din’

wta. Sim ilarly it uses i . 1 8 to explain the

shortening of i ; of. al so note, p . 109, and A ppendix D .

’

P. 1 2 8 , l . 1 2 , for‘

end’read ‘

m iddl e, ’ and add as a note to the S li t.

( iii.‘though all the MSS . (except W) read sa/rvatra sti n

'

tasya, it is not

clear why the words are needed in this Sutra.

’

P . 1 2 9, l . 5 from bottom ,for

‘

see v. read ‘

as attd, by iii. 2 ; of.

var. lect. v .

T heN

has occasionally dropped in‘

I in part of the im pression ; I have

noticed p . 5, m aggo ; p . 2 5 , nz

'

ttizdro ; p . 69 , l . 1 6 (Sli t. 7 )

nollah ; p . 10(Sat. j no ; sim ilarly the e in stiedne, p . 1 1 ;

and les‘ena, p . 8 3 , l . 1 2 .

u s ham an : n

a afi w ngwt wgt vam fi fmfim s“fi ant s ag fiérm tfi a’

rw rfimfir: u 9, u

arvfiitfi am aavtaw m v i ew s 1

gar sta rt efi ffifi‘

avfi w as : first II 2 n

atti c-ruf f set area m é nfiwfim m 3 113-01: e n's?

ag ar-11536 312 7 15 1 l m arl

—(Elsi a nvfrvé

'

es m'

a: nwe

{firs“an wa rt fiurarm we {fit Ha rm s?s amifiéw'éi

m fg“( Rim a i m i w rm airs

-

f i r stars at 1

R613“? affai r l w e was W entrant? I sm i

as w a s vfiw stre am I qfs

fi é ) vrfis'fistg") I Ravi are? I vii ?) tuft s? I wearairs? n

m fg aas? I wfifi nffi Hare m l HfiWHJ w e 1 arm i

f’

g‘

wuwas I afar; l we I I w fi mm‘rSt i ll

W fi'

g slag m i t er:"

s ue?“{31d Rafa l Eff?!

vi a— ii dee st in A ; Cf. Panmi, i ., 1 , 70. 2

80e ; A BDEW

rah: MSS .m a gi ; Cf . L ass . I nst ., 2 65 .

ll HTE HHEFT’I ! ll

Fore s t 11{fie I fira'

fi rms l'

éfifii 1 am } l wa s?“rim s?) u

vil li) wafern“( d It

Eran ( mam aaé gwrfi a m m i a‘rRafa nRa m

ditt l s fifi l firs

‘r i nfirr

'

n'

fiT -‘

ri l'

éfi nam l i i z zi n

e vent “k a rm a

sax-

as?{air-

I‘

m wfi wafi-I né’r

‘

éu

m m w fm‘

rnfim‘rar tis t as sha ft :sm utvita

”

1

wa rrant it

m grage é aW 21 3 firstanwafera“dif f

Ra fi 1 first Ra in 11

11W 3 3 12 13 was nafa at afirs t) s e m i) 1“( i t 11a m

"

( firfi fi wrfidt fi'

fm auwar ( mam fm fi

“eu-3 arm

-( 12 1 i) wafa at u a s first a? first 1 craf t

1

W ( and H em a {ti .

2

A B fife-gal

) Of . 8 .

3

B fi lK ‘II -r

M ss. TO

T.

5‘

g U deest in A .

11 m m: ufi‘

fi z : n 3

wm rr‘r arr

-é tut-m i l 'flfim am 1 m ailw i l l

ant a mr’

I T af tug rfi 1 avgm tg; aim ?) gram“: I G fi i

fi rm ?i fiz fifi i é z rfifi i I E ffi’

ifi'

u am I am

mart 1 m m l ara g a a 1 3 am t artar I fli rt m y

z rarfircm fg-a ém rfcm 3 Tr€fi i u

an fi am figw a m fi Haifa“an a 11 ; am ax

H‘ET aa t am 11 8 3 1 1 az r aan n

fm W {m wmrri‘

a‘rwafa an 1fit s?flut e

fli t : Elfin”? "w‘i’

s

ci fi m Eng fina l

a? fit? IIN I fagn fiii t m fim aFae—r: I fang”fi g u 1131

W Q éafim fiqa amréfu

“8e ‘né fi

'

fi m wart”: atr€r1W T I

uajri ft fam QQ E TW W WTQ {65e wen t?

Rafa u m was 3 16 3 3 11“{3 1 ffi éfile fi r’

It“( fit W 1

m w ai fi a i f?! fiwéwfin‘

u uri ft fa aaarfz g a

So ACBW ; B , m l. B gm }.

8

A QM fag ; W 0m . ; (37.

34.4A (not C ) ad ds mi .

5

A {a g ag wm'

eqaflqi B 5 3q

wawm i D fl mz a'ami W {3 1 3 3

‘

s flimg r‘

fi qi ; A has no Sans .

e xplanation .

“A fi tjfag ; C fi ‘fléfHE SW has fag g

’

fifié} fa

(078 6 1 : A C have no San s . explanat ion,

8 II m m uafla : ll

wafi u fw‘rfi

‘

r u fin: {fa n

t g’qfiéarzfifi a w ?warn u w 13 3w u

a s m awfi fw m a fi éfifi am t rga’

a

fi am fi {M a i {a n }nfirm finafi {fi xa a

QRfift Ti’

fifi‘

TW i amfi t i ara u {If-é? first ll am t?

sw gam'fi:

'

fi a flaw 51m ! {633q i i i Hat?! u

nfihw{fiam fz a ri fia rw g em wafa nmfira’

r

s

fi

rfifi i l artvrz i l'

cfwrfii l afifm’

h gi i l afi m fi fllmflfl

swam m afia-

l an fiTuafifiql fifi‘

tul'

fi fla m tfit u

fitm fig tan-

( m qanfi Haifa nhis naffirm?

nfiwfi u

m m a nt a fli rt? emf?! II fi rms?

1

A fiQWffl'

.

2

A {i i i }W ragga};

D n.l. : Cf . L ass . Inst., p .

1 10. 3

DW add before aha-

ff}.

“A 0) CW i ; BD {Q

A Wfi g} Cf . L ass . I nst. , p .,2 70. 6

BDW add firms} fi rm i7

A (not0) awfii.S

A fi g'qi Cf . L ass . Inst., p. 2 57 .

”A 11 but BE

11130.

10BD wrag} : Cf . ii ., 1 6 , and L ass . Inst., A pp ., pp. 49

,70.

Hm m: u u

til-m m y

“? 1 tfim zfi I (fla i l? a

‘rfgfi ll aw gait

W l gm : 1 F18 3? 1 fi g? Hm m?afi flwfiqa amrfiu

s ig ma? F23 5?“is? Ha rm fla w? Rafa at

W {fiw fm i m rw a t?! wa rt? was

ffi I I m

m afi uwfii l a féffi’

h fi wwfi l flafi u

g ar-

E u3IE u ngffifizr (fig m é e at”

?

gum?Zfi“2 m m W W ( ant? warn u gfi lfi u

a rg ue?W W w rfi warn u Ra ‘s}u

w as? 3 m m flair nafi at I aaifi fia firearm

fia‘

I I 9 ? 3 3 6 i n

W W nm fi wafi u fia t u

m fi wfifi uam’

l am m fi nafi l agfi

anfi ua m gmr l a fi l afi ufi nm n n

l

C D m g“?3 1 at and sim il arly in Com m .

2

A g a g gi ; DC3 o\ 4 a

Q i fi'

d W adds flai l A arafa ah .

II flm fl'

flflfl‘fl! II

"7qu17s fi g wri fi m w ( arrf rwafii I I {151 I fin?!

F7 73? I fa?) I fiim f’f fi fiafi

‘r fihfi I fiim fi

fif‘fi I fili ng? I fififli I fi at? fawn fa‘

éfli‘r fi mra‘r

fi t l fmfl l fi arua fi l afll affi l g ffi t iara 73am

am’

m téw l é flrr l t z a l fim l é fia l aar l w r

afg ai l agm a afi l afi m m u

“re a {573 17e va n

-“rwarn ll W 13mm?

33 517513 73 1? W e?“fi t fiéz

’

awig? li m it ref-«fi n

Qt'

a’fi fi'

l m a ss}? I m are s}?n 1m m af‘aa'

fi i t ?

an nH E EL! w t”

? l fiaa éaa I fi é a I w ri t-7 naw n

m m 3 711e 3333 11773 7 : u

afi a’

i mrgim ri'é aflm flin t} ll FW

'

I fig?

afi a

'

fm gm tfqEifi i'

flflt fi fi a rr‘rwarn ll Qfi

‘

é}

E ft é‘rl m fifi

’r u

ari as-2 em s-Ea Hz“fla tt er ( m i? warn at u m ?

a } nwafiaafam mflmflm fi aqfi a“fi a tfi a

fiwfia wafer u

1

A (not0) fiat rz‘r. .

2

A DWfi§ifi ;C figa

’

h B fi ’i

‘lfi ‘

Of . i .,15 .

3

BW fi ag‘

; Cf . ii ., 7 .

‘

A give s the Satra ag araJ

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

c IIWTE HTHTTQ I ll

magma}shanm z mrfi N E 3 7 I“d ream ? await

w 3 74I I wag? I I

wa

rm-rm wri framfi Rafa I I fi g? I afia m

’

I fi rgi’r

fi éé’

rI I $ 333 I"

f l ai l I $3

31 n I fi m fi I I

{fit {fim fi g 1 5 2 15 3 73 m m {m ari a} Haifa I I

we ir I xv ii ? I avg

fi wfrI I fi t I firm I film I m afimqfi

si r I I $3 1 6 Fagi n: I I fi ne

-FT I are as}? I I fi l m II

v’

fi‘

m é flan“: m am-

fr uafir I vant a g e? II

m t é I“nevi I I

g’

é’rI gfi wfi r I gi rfi

-a'

r I I fi rth fi am a I fi e I

frfiaawI f rarfi‘

zfl I I

I I i f?!w asm auafli wf’fi fi fim I I

I I w e : fi z z I I

31

BD me t al}.

2

AW W E E} ; B i ii CDW 11 3“Only

W has$11 17}at as a new Sfitra.

4A CW gi ft

5

CW33 7W .

I I femuruft fi z z I I a

I I are] ffi’

h : ll

wfizaflfi $2 1 I an E ’r’

ff am m a gm, aiam ararf rQ 00 0

Hem m er am t 373 5117733 3 17233 31: I ai m? arrfi ar aha : I I

w e I I agaiéfi fafi’

I 75757 I we} I I a m a fafa far I arm—ci I I

a gar-fife I a nafrfi n m

'

fi: I I warz fia fia I a n3 7337e

EITHTFL II

m afia?3 3 TH?afim m ga m rm rf‘

rafim am i m a? an

a‘ru‘rHaffi I I m atarum m ? I I I m a I war-air

mari na-a wn ? I

-na e” are? I T

‘QEf II FIE I I am

’

r I

Perm i t I I ( 6 1 I 773 77 I r m? I I tIizI I an? I fave I"

g e rm? I I”

g in-é {F6 2 7315: W T QW gm a rfz fi

‘m fiz Ea'th

313 615 77 171 m anta affirm : W W TW TfiT flTfZIT Hfi I I

W l m l mam I I am I-cflw I fz a érufffi r I a

-

fi n

m a aW I afi a I g fi I m-

I I W FI I m l firflra m z m

W I a fi I figa IW I m e aaa I fi I-

fl fim u

W e ? wfig fi afia a? a m a I I Efl fi I fin

m m I fi ré I“a m warm N ara

-ir I

‘q fi I wm’

h

l

A ‘qi ( altered from i ts old reading) W2

A C i fia fl‘

ffa

a re-1 17 1 ;Dwrap ; Cf . S . 3 1 .

3

n gfi . A CHf“.

a

BDW a ny}:

m a .

6

F or sf]? see iv .,5 ; DVV say}.

7

B g a f ; D HW ‘

8

BW

1° II W igw am : II

aaafim’

r I I m a I fim vma IW W I W e I Iw ar I

W I 3 :2 7a aae m a I I

m afia I I I aim? IIwas I twi n

m rz rrafia I I I z i'ei‘t I I w e I viz : I I

W f‘fié m Fifi ?waft! II Gram II

a m a firfirarr-Fri I 11 13 m em fi afimqarz : II

infer-

é} I I’

m-

s tir I E'

s-{f r I I

W fi rm w e“Rafi IIfluf f II

fi rearm}? m m uf f t iara II afz m'

II

0

3 6 3733 14e Ha rm {Em irwafir II W I re? I

w a i t I ti figz‘

i I I 15361 I ( K i t I“a rr

-

a I i i i I

fla i r I fas

vz‘

I fia ri i I fi r; Iqfis’aié I I arm“( aa m m a

(and A originally) waa af D ram .

1

A l tered to aag arq’

r in A ,D

has g agqi.2

DW add several m ore exam ple s not in A BC,e .g.

wa r, etc.

3

A -faa\'q DW give the S I

’

i tra m fz aifi amfi aia

fi afiz fiw avg]“g ; and add in the C om m . the Prakrit form s

flea? I I (D ffi fi )4B om its w e i r I wrrfi I

5 6 7

em f? I B fag?A uni t. A C ufiafi

‘

r; DW qfe aa ;

EW3 3 3? B om its it ; thi s ex . cannot properly belong to thi s Sfitra,

I I Fem :qfié z : I I

faéfi I m fir I fie fa I s a fe?I w e I 3 3 I éaa I fiem

da re I éflfii I nfiqfifl I I

1113 {fi g Ha rt?! s a ri?warn I sfitmrarz : I I arena

I w as” II

”flit-m i“( 7m m wan t?“are u flfimi II

WW W W mm fi tiara II w e? I

m m gm m w fi w fiuwfirfi Iafi ié‘rIfi éa

’

rm

w z né g a rt er“33 7336?wafer II m i ? II

ém fifi a s?i t“<m ( w i th“afarIIfi r“? I

yet i t seem s to be confirm ed by the Sanksh. Sara,rul e 7 1 .

l

W reads2 8

Wfiwrvfim ffiatfi mem rm e z. BD“3 3 m? A om l ts i i4 x

A E f fi’

zé‘r, W -

a , BD m eal E then addswarz rfiargefl .

fi z z : K ara t-

2 11 m m a sta rt . (an £73 3 3 W E N T?!

mm : I m 3 132 1016 ? fii fl a g“?(0I ; Cf S .40, andS . 3 8

,note ; the Sank sh . Sara has a rule ( 92 ) qfi

'

g imm i‘

; 1

( rug ; qfig a’

; see L ass . I nst .,p . 197 . A -

T'

€ 5W i t

1? I I m es-«12 m m: I I

arr I are I Iqm mmI max I“as I I waa é fiaam aze I I

nm f m amm m fz‘

affia’

?am rri‘

a’

?Haifa I I m i ? I aa‘

w‘

é? I 3 6 5? I 3 5131 1 1? I I m uI am : I e m : I vaqfr I I ard?

nam e—a m 6?a m in Fr—m i fifix: I I

m am a? 17m m wm fi Rafa I Imam I I

e m ffim é fi aaa m'

fia 2m i ii? at“h e I rwqflé I ( arm I“( rim m fmsa’

m am a am w”

em f?wafa I I m m I I

ara’

nm i ' 3 m m em f? t iara I I m ini? I I

m m rfiaffia'

?e m f ?Rafa I I we? I flea? I I

{fig s ez em f ?t iara I I am I ( we? I 3 3 a?A \

m am a

’

s?2 m m e m f?Haifa I I tare-

é I I

2

A dded from BDW,A om .

3

W m afia?4A a} BC a fi

DE W a}; W m a}.

5

A CW ‘BD “ash:

6

A reads z’yam

in all the exam ple s ; W expressly adds p a/sshe ya lop afi.

7

BD fi r

fla b6

A fig mz n

9

BEW ( and probably A D ,bu t these are not so

I I (aah : I I R

e am ram rm ff m a m t? I I m fm i I arm‘s?I

w e? I I m a {F361 I I mfe zfr I sire s? I firfae?

z m m raarm m ti’

mm em f? wafer

aimf II

aim-Jars

“?3 m m m rf? Rafa I Iwe

re I I

mm m m m m fi g amum f? wafer I I firm inure

m I turf? I and I I

151mm fim amqm am m fa‘

afi a i“em f? war

-

c? I I tam

HTEIHJ I 133°

I fiam I I we I I in? I m int? I I are: I I m m I

m a? I Iwe : I I m en aim? I I am I Ium I f m f? I I are {753 I I7 S

were? I m m? I muff? I m am? I m a g m a? I I“

fitq' I 1 mm I fie I am : I m a r I am I “( TEXT I afar I

am I n ew I HE W I warm I 3 137? I w e I E OE ZHHTH I I

clear) 3 : and s im ilarly in the ex . E has in S li t . é?a ; the Sanksh.

Sara has 3 ; see L ass . I nst ., p . 209 .

1

BDW and probably A HG T?”2

A om .

3

WDE have the 3 throughout ; the o ther MSS . vary

be tween 3 and 3 ; Cf . L as s . I n st ., p . 209.

4BW BDW add

gm m . \Vmgfi .

6

A CDE a i m} ; BW -qi .7

Ob scure in

A B,but pla in in DE .

8

Plain in CDE ; DE add the Sans . interpr .

W has several different exam ple s .

1 8 ll HTfiiflflafl'

fi Z II

113 13 waa‘

téanflwarn I I new? I I (w e? I I

m ut e Emm i ?R afa I I aéifi I I

s fig rfi am fi a t“313 m G an-

Tr? warn I I“a'Fi’ET I ne w? I

RE EF? I affirm ? I I 25 653 ? I z igtcfi I {E ur-Fr I I

”

?

tfrrfi I Wri ter I“tiara

-

é? I I Efi'

i‘

T I am I new I grater“( wa rt I arm I figfl I shut I fi rm I nfi fi r I arm

{firem a n I I

wari fifii I I Qui nl an wa rm a ah-

Ti t

fi I a é’r I E-Wé

‘ruafie w m g aa u

W m?a ffirm“G afl

‘

fi'

war?! I I a?) I I

fiTT TH’

JIEZ-i'wri éfim fl uf f Rafa I I fiim

'

i I I

1

WE have 3 plainly throughout, and so m ostly A ; but the o ther

MSS . confuse it With 3 ,D has g twice ; Cf . L ass . I n st., p. 209, and

Sanksh. Sara , s.

2

W 5,8

A grey—

( r, but the z'

is a later

in sertion,and con tradicts i . 1 3 , and the o ther MSS .

4Afia rfi W

fir .

5

D ag e-j g} and adds the San s . flgq ; by L a s s ., I n st., p .

100; W om .

6

BC "

a ; W a : D a : A not pla in .

7

T he a is plain

in BCD ; W has a.

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

15 I I m anna-

m : I I

wri fifi fi e? I Hal? m at t e min i } Rafi I I mi

arm }I and I 112

15515} I I

qa‘

ia marin a ra }: am fi t iara I I we g

i

f t I fi rm

aiéq‘r I I we: I I i i ? I em s? I m ini I I

( i f 326 3 11 712 5 mant a em f?Rafi II fig

I war-

( g

art ? I fit ? II

tia ra?nwm arat at {na e-

2 are: anwarn

z en-vi i I am ? {can} I

‘

z z réi g e t-

é? I I

m ans?8 5mm am t? Mira II I I

g uru'

s?am ai m wafer I I firmer I I

I I {Fri“( F6 5 3 m m mfli wgmaéfifi fim

Fame : wfifi i‘

: I I

‘

w onl y a}m2

A l tered in A tonm’

rfim'

fi; BDW add 3 1W0 x 4 0 5 oI? I affirm I a m t

3

Aq A a m}. W a i r ; the o ther

M SS. are i ndi stinc t be tween -g°

}and Of . 24.6

W {1} etc .

97

DW add HT8

DW addfla g} ; Cf . L as s . I nst ., p . 2 19 . W 73 .

BD add a reference to i . 20.

II E FTIEJ: ufrfi z : II 10

I I 1 m a ah : I I

m fi m m atm aafifizarfli a’

I ffiwafii I I ma m a I I

wfi I fira—fi I I W I gzg

'

I I firs g‘r II m I fi m

‘rI éa ‘

r I I

m y I ti me-

I I m i ni? I I “a s: I m m I 13m I I we I

waif-f r} I I are I in? I fmgfi I I we I refers? I as I I am I

fireman I W I FGIW I Era W'

c-

gar I W I E E’

TH I new

m l g a mfim ufiéh fi gm wfa m fi g u

wm m m w rn mi ammra zfa m at fir‘rtfi uafa I I“c m I

tired I « (TI I gm’

r I 36

1 771 I I am I I Em it I I warI I than I a‘m fi I I

m fi m m ga é‘rmfiuzfiaam t efitfi t i ara I I

w e: I I e ar I w e? I fiasafi I I aw I I afié fi I fiizfi‘

I I ( E I I

was? I aa’

I IIW T I a-

QW I fama a a I t IaI I a ai I m u

{ sti r“Em ananti}Rafa I I i i i? I i ts? I I sti r I é g

’

r I I

( 5 I ( i f I I

A dded from BDW . A l tered in A to41 A dded from BDW.

So in all the MSS.

5

w gm} (wan ting in BD ) which it explain s

by gm . A arm’

I (wanting in BDW) .7

A originally

l ike B ; w Cf . i ., 20. 8

BD add gar mg .

l )

i t II Tif'

éi'

flflafl'

flt II

8 753 716 3 5 1m m afitfi warn I I na e-ah I ifil‘fifi fi ar

m'

fiéri tég m fm an swan“: II

mm rafi rfiféfiw a’

i tfi I I 1 i new?I

1 19 1e m‘

éfiffiwafi II 155m} I I

3 a, a {flam zfigzm at flan-

( w re ant m i fa ta

E EfQQfi E Tg afa I I $ 6 ! I a i m? I warn-

a I am I“at Im i i I I 3mm 2m m? I I

wfirarfl$11 I a t ufié fl m’

fié fia m i ngmfw fi’r

33 56 156 fifz aafi IIW e I a fa r?“5 1? I I gam ed s sh vécu

g rams: gram z anfi wafa I I a? I II

a ffi ne-2? 33m z anfi Rafa I I a? II

1

T hi s Sutra c orrup t in AB (and in A the Com m . as well) ; CW 5

DE am BDEW agree in the Com m . and ex .

2

W adds aqfi'

a fi.

3

W“a t ;

“Ga'nz .

4BDW

m ; A“Q; 5

E has Q and so originally

A ; thi s is required by S . 50; Cf . Boehtl . Sakunt., n ote p . 17 5 ; BW7

(11 ; D . n] .

6

Sutra s 9 , 10and 1 1 are confused by L assen . A

I I m : arm ing : I I at .

W ? wm fi Rafa I wafwfiqm arz : I I 3 2 251

gil

I aafl’

r I afi'wgéi um I am I g fir I mam

d afi fi m w W a m fir I I am

( h as? ”

am G erri ?warn I I tq‘afi I I

w é m e m f?wafa I a s? I snfirifii a warn

fi rmauwar z firfir I I m ay at? I I

aha-m a?{we W t?wafa I I than) I I

25{any m rfirm‘

rg m e m i t wafa I I

5 737.I

so BDW ; A’s a g

e

}is corrup t ; see L as s . I nst., p . 103 .

2

T hi s Sutra wi th it s Comm. is variously written : A C ( and probably

B originall y) as above ; DE (and B now) a ; fi g,wi th a corre spond

ing Comm . but the sam e ex . ; W confu ses SI’i tras 1 3,

the text of

A C i s the sim ple st,the 3 be ing el ided by i i ,

1 .

3

So DE,and B

has been altered to this ; A CW read the sun,W W RQH 3 1

and the Com m .qfi‘

g ( rag fla g}, etc . T he Sanksh. Sara follow s

DE in i t s two rule s 1 1 5,1 34

,the latter be ingfig ; E fi

'

mfi i‘

.

4A

W So MSS . Cf . L ass . I nst ., A pp , p . 5 3 ; D adds a reference

a. I I fll fiifl'

flafl‘fl: I I

n'

ag £ 627 13 aim fairRafi I I a t I ti lt I gil

t I ana I

ti t-«i I I

R aina}sierra : i m i ufi wafa at I I (ai r I 135 1} I I

agrz iuiig r i g 25m Fri {tari f f Rafa I I a

’

tft vi I a?

fiUs’

I I éifi isi I I 9mi I I éfi I I aw nm m fam’

i 52 1

113 fi gfie: m uf f wafi I I treat I new? I ma n'

s}

F?3:63am z arrfi warn I I eta-

gait I mm ? I we? II

im am?W z en-

Grwarn I I w e I I

33?{fiam fig‘

ri {am z anfi a wafi I I grit I fe m?

aw ard I “fi n I m am? I am ) I fi rafi s'

fi I afim r

“xi-fir I afi fl I gvfi I I 233?I afifi I Edam I arr—ir I “m adfiafiar I fi afiai I affiaflI anti I afifl I 133? I I

to iii .,50. 1

So MSS ; Cf . i ., 5 .

2

D adds am m a\qém fi

3

g a g rqrifia a im-

( z fi rm (added in B m m argin) . BD fa

fi af

.

4A a“; for the doubling in the ex .,

of . iii . , 50, as in all

s uch case s . EYV om . D 3 3 3: afifi.

6

A W

I I E ffie : aft—6 27 K ! I i t

W ine: rim“e m i t Rafa I I ng

‘f I I

fi g $12 1 251 nae: I I as?) I t ing

s? I fil i ng") I fan?) I I

w e {are 3 6 5 ! m ?! Q ‘HTH

'

Gh -fi'

ffi I I are: I I fi t?

um I I W l fiifi'

fl w uflfi ll fi fi fl lafiff

faan m m m r nfim n W i fam lz

é'

fl ll

w 3 1 {fi ndfim fi Rafa I I WE I I 1 18

3 2 I 3 13 11 31“3 1131“Ema-sir IW ait I I 118 1 I m an: I affirm I {was I I

W 1 a ah-

fi rwafa I I a re: I I Hiahé I mm ? I I em

Q'

fi l ‘é’

fifi ll m ll fi fi l'

fi fi fi'

ll

a fa {5&3m “TI E ! m i ) I I 1 15 3 I a a’

i l

W fi w a a r I gfi I gf I éfi I afi’r I m

‘r I ga fiu

flfa I a fifi I gn I é’

Ir Iga I a fm m g‘

a m g w am

a rr l a a m fa a r I-

gm"

FIT I551? I aé

l

a I ( a I g fin

( 6 3 1173 2 1: I I

‘

W adds Fam i W adds fag-

g}.

3

A g m ; 5 see note 8 . 2 1 .

‘

BDW g g‘

.

5

DE w ax A C seem to read fi ’é BW om i t i t ;

Qy . 113 3 5? see 8 6 11 3 30. “A firs t a)

7

T he ”

(H in A i s only a

rudely form ed g .

8

E D add W mm .

”

W flag: z “a .

So BDW,with Sans .

3 34A i s not quite clear . Aw 3 3 ; B g a .

K? I I 2 131712 371 31: I I

113 1: m um s em i ?Haifa at I I a t ”I Lam I I ai r I ( an? I I

6 1? I t-m'

I I 2 3 315; a m m m’

f efi a m“?“a“rmarfinn

w{fir-IQ qwfimaam’

wgm e m i t ti ara I I N I I

five? I“war I we? I fle w? I I vi m I 3 52 3 3 affirm fiat?! I I

$ 16 11? 1 5 {H am i sh wafi I I “are I are} I w as

I I

w nm fi m g i uw nfimg I m’

r"m anned

fimé IIW IIm’

r I feqéi II af'

s I ag I fi ra I nga Ififlgn

QW I EQ IM I a a II

fi ssure}; W a m anriwfrnae I I five?I I

0 o 0{tiim at m aximum wafii I I nun I m Iti m m‘

sfi I I7

an: I aw I firm : I I

1

DE add Qqfi' here ; W addsg?sffi affi fifi aJ gfi I ( if?

2

BDW “g A g ] wrongly AW transpose m and 35; in the S li tra ,

but A agrees wi th ED in the order of the exam ples .

3

BD ENE ;

A alga W aqgfi}4L ass . om .

5

A has a m arginal addition fiqfisfi C fiag rfi

“DWfim fiI

‘sfi ; ABC fw sfi

7

80D ; W

has firazna.

S

W Q Q tn: i t reads S . 38 before S . 36 .

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

R8 II II

ar{ti ara n awanri ‘a

’

rwaft-r I ria’

ra'

r'

fim i?I I weir I

a a fl ai r:“

da tum th a t £ 3 2 1 13 m marrfi

wafir I I are: I IW eir I I a re I I an) I fimm’

I I wa

ter I uni

331 I I m y: I ai r I firm-tr I tia ra ?“than ! I I

x

WWW m E {mam a } Rafa I I ara am I I

firfiurm fié gar-er1 13 m am a wafirI I firffi ara

'

r

firfl m i}m ua rfi a rf‘rwrath ar I Iaah-fr I fai th

8“arm a rm nah

-

rt? arafir I I =Jsmlrr I I

in such uncertain ty , E ’s reading has been foll owed becau se it at once

brings them under iii ., 1 ; Cf . Sank sh. Sara , 1 3 8 , 190.‘

cy. iii ., 2 .

2

So CW and probably A (for L assen’

s 3 1) DE read S 1’1traW‘Q‘i fi'

giving ex . in Com m .,but a , Q] are covered by iii .

,2 ; B has been

greatly al tered.

3

E D ug tg (D originally -g r) A E -qr; W sq}.

4A

qg ‘

rn6

So ED ;0war-é}; A E R?“W give s the

Sri tra fag-él a-fi at adding to the Com m .

“gm Ra

e-

a fi an

firfirw rit 63

'

s?s arr‘

fr53m : II fai n? II7

BCD'

éara’

r; W

a ; A fia i fi'.

80m a r A originally am ; but al tered to an .

I I e arn : ari a-

z : I I 2 1

“ear {51m w ri t warn I Iw I ( firm?) II a ura-am}

firairfi: I I

g m"

a“r Erm i ne ? aé

‘rt arfr Hflffi I I

31m ararrJI{fi t I am? I Iinfi rm I I era I I I I

warz rrafirfat I I ( erred I 13 1311 I flai r I I

W I m vi I afig I {rfl'

l g fi l i i ffi fl l filfl l fi aafll

gram wa

r i ari vrra'

rrrfz rfi r sfirfifirfiwarsag a

£11 351 13 an? ri m”

?ar fi fg am 1351: m a gma? arr

wife II 3 5113 gum 12 am 2 2 m i n Hai r fi r

’

éa Fer

zfiafi I 3 13 131151 : Hawm fiah wsqa‘

r: frari m’

rrg ar'

éa

m m: I I

firm I I Erw in wi th I ga r I fwaat’

rq‘r I firarfr I I

a ri a-er I I I i f?I W ? I fm fiq‘r I Falk ner I an?“

are a I a}? I 3111

’

s I I

wrw a Iwé I gfir I fifi k I ga I fm fir I g ffi I afg I

fi z I fimfi I fw rt I aa I a'

flfi t h I gw I I

1

Cf . viii ., 40; and Pan in i , vi ., 2 , 5 9.

2

A O 3 1 15 a : rift;8

A fter

warn,A C have ”

gram flawe rfiaa’

rféfia fi tfiu’

fi a? ar

33 m m ,and W seem s equally confused : the rem ainder i s therefore

given from D , to whi ch B has been al tered : the exam ple s are given

as in BD,A be ing in several place s illegible and confused .

V? I I m araaarra : I I

are afiam firg a arfr afim awa a Iaa Rafa I I i t? I I

aa‘

r‘

ra ra‘

rérzrrfi arwar I I arr-i Iaa I airfis'ai I <3a I ara

ai’r I aha-m i I I are I aira I

'

finaJ arra a l aaaI I araar Ifi aia I I

aura ara ar'

fiaaafaa a aa rr‘rwafa II aa I Ara II.

i a aarrra’

rfaa a wafa I I 2 17 76 IW I aflar I m a? I I firei I

are? I farm I arar I I

arr-a W W arrawaarri

‘

m Faraa Rafa I I a rm I arr

mafi I I a lta r I a r'

a fir I I aura afa fir I I ( mg

r I I “Eli ”I I

0\ o 0 0 0 0 o

a irm an? Fm a wafa II aara’

r I E 331“I I aarrar I m ar II

Of . i . , 1 9 .

2

A B i f D a} E -?g-'i'

(DE add,w i th a sim ilar

variation , as afiarfiaamf‘

a fmafiaaara afirfia‘

r; Cf H fifer

Z eitsch.,vol . ii .

,p . W om . ; Cf . L as s . Inst ., p . 2 33 .

3

DE fla r

ash.

4So BCD plainly Cf:L ass. In st., A pp.,

p .45 .

5

W adds Era,

6

aara‘

f raar: fisa a {maa a'

Ia a i r. A aIa aa (on gm ally a a

BCDE “g aff (D orig . i ii ) fi

‘

a'

; W 3 1130

} H em a-ch. has

arm ?a : I wa i t : rig-rm m m? 611 Rafa I 71351 was Cf

L as s .,p . 246 . g ig

-

m a.

S

W gag ; m am .

”

AW rim

DE add fi a afi ; BDEW add fi ri‘afirfirfa

’

(W 3 a ) aria-

ear;m

T hi s Sutra is only found in BDEW ; H em a-eh. has a S utra, N a dir

g/zdnuswdrdt p arayok fsesfiddeéayor dwz'

twam .)n

T hi s ex . only in

I I aah : ari a-ab

et: I I as

Ba ri? i fi afi ar Fara Rafa I I“mam rn? I avarirtfi I

angina-

arr? I m arinara? I I i agzfi I a rm araiair? I

flTWTE t T I I affirm I arguaa r I i aaafir I arra naain I I

aarfi aa rfa‘

g a raraj? ar Iaa Rafa I I fia ri rfiar I ira“f

in?I mafia?ma? I %a z aa I a rea a raa I aaria aaha

afi I

fi rfa‘

ai? firfaa? I afiaa? afa‘

aar? I a faa ra? afiaa rr? I

f t? I“( ah I T? I 3 138 3 1? gf

‘

a’

a? I area? are? I amt?

that? I famra? arara? I ma fia? ( 71331 11? I“( ah t a I firm?

fi n? I gag? II - iiar I rrai I afi I 3a I affira I aahaa I

fi faa IW ar I a ffiarrr I are?I rrfa Ina a H E’S I aa r l

fi a r‘

a I fila ra I"

( far I fira I aa i I I

a rr-era finraafiarf lara ar

'

aa?aira?ara arrr I I

arfira rr? $2 1 I arr affi aam fiaaa faaaré i i rara I I

farr'

arfag a rm Fana é? a afa I fanaaara a : gearam?

N 9 10 0x 1 1

fir‘i‘fiarar HFE T HT Rafa I aaa 3am (arm 1a? am

t: m a?

B ; DE in stead ( lira {rm rim afa aari n: fig ; (0. ‘

so D,A B

mgyr in the other words the MSS . clear up som e doub tful le tters of

A ; W has several errors here .

2

BDE figfi'

a“W 3

B (not

A) fi'

gfi'

i r.‘

ADEW a h ; B A h.

5

A 11 the MSS .W}qg’

}(W\ 9 0

Haj?)6

A EW 11 3 1 (cf . L as s . I n st ., p . BD seem to read Iraqwhich6\

is better,as a re; i s neuter in i ii ., 3 5 .

7

A W $ 1353 .

8

W here and

elsewhere am qaq.

’

DN

A'

W afila ,

i t II HTE FWHI'

TX Z II

Rafa I awai : I I fafi ra’

I fafara I ram? I tart a r I Brim? I I

arm é ga ar ar fiaa tfi nafa I gh a aflat ar u

wafflafaarr'

fia I 3 71 airlb

faarfaaaa: I farifi a a wa'aia I I

0“(P

11 13 gram firm s?“afar I gag : am : am t ara wafa I I

fir? I Far? I faifra? I I far-Era? I fiaairai I firfaim? I

m ar

am m m am a m aam a m au

a naltar“( 67am faaa

‘

rfi wara I am

a arara Rafa I I (am I Iran-

fl I I

fiaaé gm fiaafi aruafir I gran a a a rrarm t ar

a rrafirII aEr-

a I ira?"

W i lla? aah {fiaafia a am Faw n? trafa I 1331‘

s: a

w m aa rar a aafir I I 113 11 1 fiqfii I aria? I I

which m ay account for the m arginal addi tion in A,noticed by

L assen .

1

L a ssen om .

2

W m a .

3

A aflflifi ; BD

w fa4w figqnni.

5

So DW (of . i ., A‘

fi fiqfi m

not clear.

6

W =qa\

.

7

A om .

8

So ABOW ; DE qg-

fi (but D

not so originally ) W adds a fi skaqf (H em a-eh. that )9

A om,

0 lO

D adds 1 15 i , W {Ii i}DE add ano ther Sutra here, I S

only supplied in the m argin of B,and is not found even in W {Q

a II a a s?a afir Ira-a fam afa II armaa ai r IIarm aa aa II

Cf . L as s . I nst ., pp . 1 92 , 370, where he quotes Sanksh. Sara, 385 .

T he Sri tra can have no place in thi s section .

3 ll m aaam r: II

I I am am i: afifi a : I I

warfafi flan-arm I afar?! a I the? aam ararrrar

m aaraaiiarafiat‘

ai w‘a as stwarn II

afiafiararraa II avatars W W I h a ve misfi

a’

r? I Era-3333?stag-

é I arm a ria -

f I fi rfi w fir'

r’

aamr

mama fia rfira'

r I awaits] firairfir'a I aarrj a’

r’r621113331

aft“?Haif a I Iafiwtai ar: I I ( re arm e at IW W I

'

waz'

aa

aIz’

I aras ai m a aé tfi Hi m-afiws

’

rrr? ”ragga"

I So AW (Cf iii . , BD in both ; Qn g

/

ZQ-fi'

2

A B m a

“A BW have onlyfi a rtfla

’

rfr‘

rararai DE havefir‘arrfia'

rfia rfir‘a

fi ‘flffl‘fl Iaa rraa (D ira te-a em f“) DEW give the

Sans. flarfla fflmfi a .

4So BDEW ( only W fi g A g a

l?

1337fl ag (the last a confused) DE explain it by firm W

byqfi g a ;“A om . both.

“T he MSS . ana“was

7T he MSS .

are here very corrupt ; W — ‘zfl'

fi from BDEW (Bm for the

1 st,and om . the 3rd) ; DEW add Sans. 3 3 73

0in“? mm

want : B then adds g agW g ating}qamg‘zi W adds

ara aé‘

araa? I g li tz-

rw ar Iw as?m a ; A has in

s tead,after rdaulum

, ag g 3 3 3°

{fla g mart ??“g ating? ( sup

plied in m arg.) ragg a}wi th no Sans. explanation. For this Sr’rtra

of . no te,transl . pp . 1 35 , 1 36 .

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

a I I nremuavm : I I

( I? I at) I am) I“m a I m a I I sm ug m a y an y $ 131

m ar-L I m ai n

fe at afim am -‘ rfi a wrm f’rt iara I I I nfisam

am t I I afim ufi mi I ari a

fa wn““s sh

“( m

“( r ( Wflflrfififi t iara gm

fiTT T I I

i

wm rfi a wafer I I Fara; II

W W ) a war-

«I I I « i t I I

W IN : nrxajm fi w rfi

flm s a‘r wm fififiafi "ma fi a? I na

a

wfivi l fzi I ami I aui u

wfi m fi fii m m llw m fi I mfi wm n

I

So B ; the o thers mg} ( Cf . S .2

L assen reads thi s Sutra in A

as an ex . {WHY to S . 7 .8

D {g explained by {g (g‘

g A a‘

g'

C W 3 3 B confuses thi s with the next S I’l tra .

4A adds 3 7

x,

in the m argin .

5

D fi z z ;W has I‘m

-

Tm Rani } Rafa

I I Haw: I I as

amwa m m’

i éfi i Ev il fig fiafir11m m I I He}I I shiv

W‘I I Efi‘él’ afar) I I m I I aim ) ? m ail ed I fish faiqfir I I

W igmafiaEw an) wafer I I as I an ”$w I i re“-fifirI

éifs igai’ruaan wa I xa I wfiI I m

’

g I‘zfii iE I m afia

fin d a I Fifi I an? I K arma : I I

a im rz g”

at-2 13 at fa? wh en I I as am?I are"a s I

«gm'

mg r I afi‘Leif? I 3 13

“353 I I az am fi a‘rmuf fin : I a?

aifiigw w m mm a fira : fmam m s fi gfiafit a nim

Fz g m : I I

W g fi

‘

M ss. om .

a

w has for these, am} m p5} ain

’

t

angel“?

3

A fiqafi (Ha sh ; B th i s) ; D (3 1113? fai

Sfi fr(el l-ding San s we M 3 2 7312 : raw ) ; E remit fa‘ma’

irs

W a?W ? era s .

4s. A (not as) .

"’A B

3133

war-

g ; DE vii ] ; Cf . L as s . I nst ., p . 2 54.“A B (not0) W ; Cf .

iii .,56 . A B an? 5 w an

?5 DE a

‘

ilr

8

A E qr“? (A originally

fig ) ; BD efgg g ; w fireg g'

.

”

A B a m}.

”

A g fifigfi ; B

W f

l l

DE“g m ; A B zagaé

W1 2

So BD

afi ; A C fafg13

So M SS. ( lV A has no San s . expl .

DE give fi g l V adds several other exam ples . A om . A BCVV

Qrfi'

; DE afa : the latter is taken ,because all ( excep t lV) have aj g

as II firm wares: I I

afiz 11rd}fi rgm z m é t at“are I I lax-I I s tar"I a s}? I

are I nag-

( a: I Hg} I am I umfi naa’

lfil fat I a sh lar

fixant rm lies I 13? I 1h“I Hts"I III se tafiseeix

'

fii e“: fife II I F A

flan-

tar: em fi aw m ega-

( f r? gifiz m am : II ai

m‘

: Il amfi l avfi I Emil I I Him : II a a‘

I I a tfi I a?"I I qrm fi I In?"I I

II“I fi

‘

efi'

awfi II Ire.

fiIm fi waj'

rfifl"a life Wham"II fiJT'

I We

"

II

sss

% f m firs t as? If as

I

fi fiw i ar m fifi a r: "351 3? I i fi fi i fl‘

wqxr

we? I I as I a1v I warII

Iifi

’

E ETI‘

Qél’ E I. 85. I

m an: W fi xw fizfié‘

r iu’

a’

wafer II i ll i Tfil ma

s rfir II flitmfim iwag

erffi u‘

flaxm I a tm fifir II

s w a shQ‘

I‘

fi fil ig“(a m ai nW réfi

“( T a n fi arari ‘ft

E zum fl l fiz z n fiww q'

m i II

a r m-em e m {m ariner waffi I I Gen

-

m I fi l’W I

as the ex . of the excep tion,which doe s not apply to $ 0

1

AB om .

2 3 o o 0 o 4 o 5

BD A Bwq; s fim , A D a fg'

.

6

B has a for 3h“.7

So W ; A BD8

Aflq D adds afia‘

r

fig-qiwas

”

A 11 except w an ( Of . Pai n . vi . ,4, B has m y

I I v i i i: vfifi z z I I i t

m a m m m ufi fi n gm m afl z m uf?

9175?m am a fa’

flm at {W ri‘

f rRafa I na

w m {a a s a re arc-

fl {a v ita wha t am : e n"

war? I I

wm fi raaxuhing I thaw r a t I I fiflshfi

'

éh I m m

?fih I I a s : I I fi’

m fi h I I =JrJim : I I Hurrah I da sh I I El f—I I : II

W W ? I ahamia e—eh I I fa : I I ( Imqfih m m

m

s-“fh I I m n

{fiahhWham : a 133 I I

i shal

ég fi I THFL I farm-

tram RTG THFLI“3 3 3 913 azhaaaag (

"mam nrfiamu

[afifirwi th 5m fish at g aah affi rm

sugar I‘

e'

gfish I I

when“?m a : hfiihg agah I“chm gfi na

‘

g ee I“s nails?was?I I

Wfi m h fim rfwh wi th i m am I

hi s?SIG-

I i i I has hfhfii I has?hfi zei Iuseufi fi i I I

‘

se w ; DE gm ; A B have no Sans . So EW ; A E'

s-L ; BD g ee.

3

DE add a fimrgf’qar.

4DE i faar ; B here corrupt .

5

W hasq]s

aw ,and in the next line

0DE “

fl'

fii: and “a in ex .

7

Aqgrn8

D sha s DE gm here and in ex .

wW {13 n

D a tmgfi}. AB have no Sans . expl .12

D arq W13

up . T he pas sage enclosed m bracke ts 1 5 only found in A C,and

hi II nm anafim : II

Ga sh srfi fim h I he?use : a ( a h I

e a se-i i I aswfi I I

a rfh at w him"

: as: I

awh a n : aun t : Wham : I I ]

II figfi tmwt xi ; II as I

figflhaua m t am : a m (« ma-eh Rafi ha y h

a jFh I I 613 i“ha s?I I{II sam e : I as I }

« c ox

da ms?aarrrm f: a n: rah anWha m : I I at I a? I I

I whe twah z Ifi fhafie ihaz II at II

where? i mmw t zh:wfim fi fiafi I I aha I I t’

gfii

a Rafa I I swi g I I

m a m a'

s}m rw mrnhéim a zh: fwfi Qfiafi Ifiafi-I I I

a m rétq‘

zh I I

has been conjec turally restored by the help of the corre sponding

pas sages in H em a -oh.,and the Prakrita Sanj ivani. I t seem s (with the

exception of the las t two l ine s) to be in verse , with exam ple s inter

posed, and as such to be quoted at the end of the Com m . to Sfi tra 2 5 ,

but it will be further discussed in the A ppendix .

I

BDEW here re

com m ence DE add at W has fiqflfiarfiwfi'

3 1 1, adding as new

exam ple s gm }m a}fla g .

2

DE add at , and it is supplied

in the m argin of A .

3

T hi s Sutra not in ABC .

4W41m .

5

W j g

far.

‘

DW add fi m fiafi aWFe-Iwfi'

i’

mm Cf iii ., 5 7 .

I I art I I as)

a rfi m nhém tia i Ha rt wamh Hafi z I I”A El

are n a?W am afi m ém fwm t w fi atm a : I I

was?I fi fe-

mi I I

i ts a s

?“sa fe

“I as I

m i a t m afi a? 1 13 13 I qfi aé nvh a Hath I I

a t zfi h II m m fafiI fiI’

ufi ai u

{TE TW :W T as ? filfim fih $3 1s I I i n I

{TH I I ( I ra? I thi s I I gfi mr I tha negg? I I a rr-I ii I vita

rm }I I flags: I high I I“i s"fi f‘b’fi I a? fmif'sfi I I e ar-«I II I vhgrarh I vha r I I a s"? I fi rieflsi I I as: I Ej fl

’

flT I I

agjéz I“art I I sam urai I Emi rate I I I w i th hr-i Ia

—"I I I

‘

A am :

2

BW m i°

A R m an.

‘

se DW and probably A ;

B has been corrected from 3 to g several variation s occur in the

exam ple s of thi s Sli tra : Cf Sank sh. Sara,1 6 2

,165 .

5

BCE “gaff ;

Dqqgfi. A onl y B th a t r—Q

w only 9 3 11 .

7

A ltered

in A n. .l,C aw n

8

A l tered in A to m y} B m l. DE qg ‘

f}.

D Q \V adds another form 5 131? A C end here . WE aga i n“

13

DE \V g ive San s . Cf . Sanksh. Sara,1 6 2 . B afiqrr

'

é .

C\

A- w

1 1q“W T as csr es as new exam p es g als ,

a ha : I a a s r II 36 3 6 1 2 I war IIwere“) I argah IIfirm I fife .

gr: I I I II-s aun a : II

sz i Haiti"ha a s? 113 Qafi aaaflm um a r

aha-

am

{Fa“( fi sh nm m rh éahfifififi m

Em it wh i m

1

D adds want :m g ai .

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

80

arch saana a h: aahaaaaw a ah a ni f 3 ha{aha

a ri m Haifa I I aa r I “da ta? IW I am fis I I aimaa

aha (“16a I I

anh saam“oath that aah {fiarari

’

ah naa z aa r

fa’

a’

i I aqra’

ah I I aa ah {Fa aa rha flea I I

a ah saam e a : (a {w i th t iara I I m I I

aah saat az a fia {Earhah waa z I I aah

afi ia fi s ihaha: I I afi fia I I

aah saat a vsat a {w ash a ata I I aaha I aa a h

“( aha I I

a arfijg avh S?h Rafa I I am a ea‘

I

aha{fira ah aha : I I aa irah aura? I aa rg IW W? I I ash"

( Iahgaa z I I affi rm I I z uhai z I I

2l

B 37m g“; D as in p . 39,note 3 ; E as in p . 39 , no te 8 . W

T‘s

-

i fs“: 3

Qf. v.,1 3 DW add w hiz : (not in E ) .

°

A g ;

E5

B corrupt ; D aqwqm E OnlyW has

an ex. of fi g ,i .e., afi , adding

‘qa“a 6 516 71 11751 Fit-Frfi t:

7

Only EW add am .

I I aa a : aft fi a : I I 99.

am a a rrfia"aafi afil avh fifl'

e ah aafiza r I am t

z’

Ié za I I aahhas-

s I I am ahaha: I I aaa ar I z rzhai

: I I aah

he‘ I I F ara I I

am n zfiahfi I I w farh era-

rah I I wash 1’

t aah I I

wh arf fit I I fi fa I fi s t-

a I I

{Ell g r? Fa ” K gfi é l i W afa'

a'

hai wafa II 53 77 a n

"i l lW 333“{Fri II 3 6 {T i l I

a-

ga‘aah: aah ah aara I I a ffliah haa

’é I art-rah has; II

ag aarahh at ah aafa I I a fiaah I a fiaaa I I ara ah I

are as I I an}: I arah: I I

agaa'

ehaia aharrri‘

ahwafer I {gal a {ma at I am

U K aha I I wahah I area-ah I I a fiaah I ara ah I I

l

a fi~ar not in A B .

°

W a a rt ra’

rah wh o

°

DE a rm am4E urea

-z.

5

D fi r ; A BW W 137}; E has bo th .

6

W 35,-

nag}

and m m}.

7

T he MSS . here and el sewhere vary between—fig and

m .

8

3 1“in serted in m argin of A BD .

9

W has two Sli tras for

S . 1 6,i .e .

,two various readings of the sam e

,w i th distinct com m em

tarie s a a “aha atWari a I I aga

‘m h :wa shaia ahah z a n

i’

vh a aa : I am?{a was: fi a aha I a a rt ra ah sfi: I ah

ea I I m am a-Ia : I I

II at a t II as II

agfiavharfiah: arr aaraarhahwafa I I a ffi rm I ara auI I

II afiaa’jass II It I

“g I I am h I am I I fiIaJI a a

‘

fifa‘

I ara § I I a I m am I

m a I I

II IaIa I aa afahIah II I I. II

fa a t aam aaz 91a E FL aha {ahararhah waa z I I"II I

a ra awa sh I ari a ari ah I alg a awash I I

[EBaah fill [10”( a It]aa :Fara?a aflhaj aham hah at waa z I ah a éaaau

arm I a rm-rah I m ar I I

II aa z II AI. II

afiaara : (an ?aah a afa I I are? I as?I as}I I

III e r’

e’

a“é

‘

IaII’

ahaaI a z IIII aa II

Z T a a Fa {warnflaw whimaafi I I

‘QZ

‘

HHFLII awash awhfihafiaah awn-ah awash an?) I ar

2

T his Sutra is onl y found in BDE (D erroneou sly gm} at bo th in

S li t . and Com m .) and in the Prakr. Sanj .3

So E ; B m i n-

i D

m afia m am°

W ara fae aahaflh~

I I aanz I I se

=sIra a rea

-

Irma: aahfaimaraar’

ata xia-fiat a aflrafi

'

ch0\

araraah a aaa : I agar aah Fafiraaa I I ara ra a I a Ia I

a ah aa‘

r I fz aI I I

Fam rm m fi arara : a aha rataaahahaa a aah-

aah II

aaa ra r aaarah I aa z r sea-

{I I m ar awa sh I a far

w ha aah a lgae} ahfia a Hath I (h i re—i: afihwha

aga’

mh : m a 15a: {Tara a agaai'

{a ha aréh I I at"

?

aa I afa II afiI I ag I afi : I I

agah aaaraai aim é i : ah a az rhah aara Qataril

W as before the a s}e tc . are used to im ply the inst. gen . and

100. case s,i .e., gifi 3 7}ra g . A a rfi a

fil‘

; B in the

Com . A has the sam e,B i nk (

originally aural ) and fiat3

A B

4have onl y thi s ex . W then adds another Sli t. S . 2 5 ) aflfiafiq: I!

e ’\

aa a fawaaaa I aa fla'a j al ag lIra : a ra : a ha i ma

0\ Q ’

\ 3 A Q

m ash wafa Iwarfaaraaaa I aaa a aaaaa I a a re-

a vg

aa a aaaraJI aha a’

Ta aha a’

Ifa are a s; I ah a ra ara

E ra aura art’

a a rfa I I W T ! aiar: aah : aura : aIfiI : aflfii :

D adds the s ix exam ple s of the gen i tive to the preceding S ii tra Cf .

vie6 .

°

W adds ah aha: aaaz“ah— arena given from DE

6\

( Cf . S. 18 ) A BVV om . and adduqi aqi in the ex .

7

A B onlyfl‘ac'

g

8 8 II fi TE flflfi Tfi : II

i 175: I I am ? I“713 I“i f? Haura-

1 1i?wmfir'

fi {Fr“a afiafi éfi z fi a wa’fi I are

wfimfifimfié‘

3m? I E fii‘

fg‘

g ( i t?i f?! £12 3: I fi f'éf

gfig'

eav

{ fi fiigfim z Il% a% l %wfifl

fia m m fia i?m a : 12 1191 mi t iara é‘

rum : I I m ic“?

3 artv“r I I aia m i s! {fit II

W IT-Eli?Ibiéfié é‘rwafi I I «I? I 3 as: I I

ag‘

m a

’

fiafim m afiféfgfiaffl I I an? I at? I a s? I I

agar-

{tam g fi:“a“SITT Ra ni a} wafer I I afi nfi

I wr-Frrc’

fla g I 31m i n 653 i I I

am fiéfi m sem i ? t iara I I m a n I m

33m g I m a n: an }I m am ; I I

aq rg flyg“a warm e n'

s?a a rrri a‘rwar?! i t I I

l

W film.

2

A B om .m asc . ex .

3

Q7“iv.,

6 .

4W add s fa i r”.

5

W puts S .

30after S . 2 6 .

6

B {fi by m istake .

7

W g m a aqqz rnfiw arrand

transposes Sfitras 3 2,33 .

8

T he exam ple s in A B are rather ob scure ,

and the form s from H’flTT are only fully given in DE .

I I ufifi i‘

: I I 8 1

m g I WWWEH'

W W I I m y fifim‘ram t

-

E I I I T I Vii—TINT

W fi m I I ref-m Hfi lfi'

Hd T E I I I B tuwi g“w i gm a : 153m l

fi ari taf g fiIurn sfrwafa I wrrm arz : I I firar’

{w i n I m i ni m um I am m r’

saw mi l l I I

fila rfi arm m fi warn 15}um : I I a am z t g I I firm

fir—afr I m a nwrath a ffi rm E m mi} I I

11 o i n{tam ari nd Haifa if?W a t ll T T‘HT ll

( m ang e: m fia i rat fag : em u3 rm?I ( Ti l I I

I ra fi rm amm fi ag i fiwt ( I?m um fi i‘rwafil I I

m m? fiaréfir I T ram? 3338 I ( Tm? m ? I I n? a t I I

‘

( fi i WW m ! 1! {Erw i n} Haifa I I“( In33 3 I t ram?

fiat-I I I

“( F 5 W :“Rag a-fl exmi {mauri

‘n

’

i nae; I I

1 2 3 4Wq

fim ,

A om

fi

. A 1I , but C z r. D (not E )“fi g . A WE l Dwrg . T he se Sfi tras on raj an ( S . 36 — 44) are only found in

DEW ; W has a few variations ; DE agre e .

7

WV puts S .40after S .43 .

8§ ll HTE HHEFTR Z II

“( Tami I I

{II 2 1?m II 89; II]

I t‘

s-Jm t : z rfifi s : m {mam ifa z E ITFLII

”

( ram II

{I m tea?W WW?II as I}T i m swarm z rz afi a at F a i nfaiaiwafii I

W 6 q II ( i t am’

I I“( rem

“( m m i I I

[ II sag-Er II seeI ]

Eff? ffiefi I ref-Gri m t ri fle ? weir? fisfi ( T'

s? {a‘

Haifa I I "( R afi m m I I 5 6 fz fi fi ata Rafa I I“( t m t I I

I:II W mfimfi fe m II as I ]

(Harsh : m }:“( Fifi ala rm wrmrrri

‘a : em uW fi!

afi m’

fi a Rafa I I ( muf ffiflffir I ( m m? Bat-I I “( m m

w ?I I we é‘

tfirH I I ( rm? I n? an I I fianfiaamn( H i I I T

uf'

é I ( fi t”

( m uf f“( ri ng I ( m agi ? I ( mafia

“( m ung I Im um t raffic I

“( T i n I ( Tana : I ( I f

-

{I I ( ra g I I

II a IIaIIaI I I WTI BIII IIM II

m a m? 3mm W Ti‘

lfi uafii at I I wait I “aw ait I I

I II aafam fi am aéafifi II II?II]

m a m? sari-i

“m ai lma n?fi rrz afifi fi a t-I r I I altar I

swam}? I swam I 3 mm? I I“m an Im a m : l

‘

flTHF lT I ant-

cam I I

II s eesaw a IaI aIaIJI as» II

fi wrgflfim m fi fi wfi wars I I am avar

1 2 4IW fi t}? a]: Wqfi'

mzfi'

v gg tffi .

3

Of . 48 .

r

i b i s

S litra is only found in DEW . W adds the form s “a?” a ffirm}.

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

8 17 II m am m al : II

I I £ 91 as :

NQ 0

HE TQ‘

W a m 1151 war?! I I ( ta r I 5 1 a an HWY

Ha l fi l fi l fi l fi flf fl

r}

: aafiaraaaa a i rfiurfiam R afi finR I 32733

£ 72 1 "wéfi ll m afia I Ra fi ? I {Ia-

e?I I {£t I {W E I

I 11m mI? I W U From {a'

fiwz 3 T {arm {m fi6

Rafi! at I I {fi mr I {firm I firm I firm Ifim r I I $3 I {am

u{m I {m I am-

m u£ aa I {aa I a a I wa I aa u

{warren m a m Qfii {m afif r at n afir I I

{firs sum“ui fii um I fifié aIm I afii am I fifii

arms

I I

I

A BW fig for (g”

A BW fig,but all have g amed; Cf .

3

A -

m .

4B

5

A “WT8

So BD and H em a-ch. A W“a t

3 ]n “mt .

7

A -m for cm in the se second form s ; B -m°

.

8

W

adds {N i ta samfirsqrfin I I {m fi’

r I {fi fth aufis'

I arfii I

K

I I as : ll 8 6

fi I am am m a e m { a m a {m ala ri a} Rafa

HT II EII'

TH l ai‘

EHHE ITH I W II HTH I HQ II

4}t m a p All (“

A ggr o

‘

L ll i lfig }

{air-

( firm : fém rfiw w e: w : {gr 13 {553 73 72 6

m a : Ilfirfln I afi m‘

mr I am I fi m fi é llfiw l tfl'

fi l

fm fm e m <3

: fi m w fifi r wafa at I I afifié

afi é w fafl afia na fé I afié l afim W II af‘

é I afia

afia l a'

czr I I

fife-

i gir<3

: arré?£ I€ {tari f f at 313 3 : I I $ T%

Efi I afis I I avi a n I a s? ” I fir s t I I K a ua i} sfiz

{a I m I a{r I I

fare-a i r £ 7 {W{fi arari frnan: I I afi

‘r I {i f I I

{Ia-Pr I WEI I I I 3 75? I I

Hz:a i m { fifi airv i fi Hafii at I I7

a? I F m} I Hi ?I I

arfii I I W reads S. 6, m : {are}flaw? I I {a rfi fiwa rm fi

m fiafli fam fi'

w e n: fi n (Pr e tc .,after the ex .

it adds m qgfia g fifiz‘qgm ( Cf . v . ,

2 2,var . lec t .) Cf . L as s .

I nst ., p . 3 2 1— 3 . BW 251i ,

and sim ilarly {hi fig.

3

13 a i m

e tc .

4BD for fi g

and sim ilarly in Com m .

5

W a; 3 5 .

6

A \V

W I“.

7

A om . ‘V at; for FFT of S . 90H cm a-eh. also give s it ,

1° II II

Era I ai r{ at a? i?{m rfia waffi I Ir?! awr

m fi n'

fi m m l aféu

3 3: m m a? fii {mam-

q1

a} 5T wafir I I fii I am I I an?

firs t I I

flaw Bfi:“a : an{m m-

3a? Rafa I I air I a}? I Em

i f?“I I

B ffi Ut a {a m a lari a} I I {fit I {a I

{am I {first I I

E rma}: at ?!“R iff SW at war?! I I 3 1111 I

WS

fié {flea II

{afrfi ra? <3 : 1211 5 z m‘

ni vfrat Rafi I I {3

fi w tfi wnffli wwfia u

l

and it is found in the Setubandha see H ofer, Z eitsch., p . 5 17 . A

om . Sans ; BD addw m l“; (for g W adds fm rqfiqQfifwr

2 0 o{quasi}{ fan

-

em itafl’

r Only m DW3

So BDE ( B am ) ;

A fwm g r Wfig"

armo

fifij H em a-ch. al so has fa .

4A B aifi

5

DW add 3 1 ; B confu se s Sutras 14, 1 5 ,

6

W qfiznflrgr.

7

A 33 :

fi g .

s

Wflfm figffi in9

A {gnffit but not so in S. l 6 .

l o

A dded

I I as : qfié z : I I {I

{a re um <3 :“(er{a wm i ‘

afir a Rafi I I 15

( fi flfi flffifii ‘i fi ll fi l flffifm afia I rflfia u

m afi am : am : am : Hfiwfam at? {mi

fi w m i m wfifi I I I {i n fi rm I I

1IWW f r In a £°ré at nafiI I I In?

{a I 11151 I I In : I I

are: { i}:{Pr{wam i‘

a‘r t iara I I i f ch Iqui t I

m g I Ra fi; I I QHGII FIJI

nam es-

rm {II-

(ai r: m a a‘rfi Rafa I I Il

s

a? I 11a? I I

lim e—{RI“GEN T : Fm awn

-

barRafa 9m .

w 13 t2rd : 6T 1"“F3 ?" 118 ”Hi? I Ea t I I wir

faffi fifi'

11? I ?I I a? l a I I a m ines {fa ran.an?“{a rm gfi: at a

‘rW m am fifir Rafa I I £ 11

from DW.

1

A {m1}. A Q'q‘

r W has as an ex. fig} 113"

‘Ififi c

“BW a}.

4BD (not W) DW a} .

“D“a ; for

8

the se cf . L ass , p . 1 2 9 .

7

g rfiqffifaf and its exam ple s not in A . A

B"A B“1 1 °

I R I I m am a-

m : I I

3& a I £ 11Inf

-

am I £133) firm I £11£ I I £73an? I am {

’

I I

II“? iqi

t

i

U lBUM

£ {é i {fi rm a?) are) fi rtfi i‘rRafi I I £ 3 I

£ 3 n ew I am? I I S'

flfi i fi rfi ffii i fi flfil rating“m art-13 I I

U]W LU III

£ fiIaIrfi s£ I £ ra£ fém rarag £F{a m éngmfwwm

am asar’

fiéié Era n?I Ira fi rfim i’fimrn: I I

6

W @Q

C: Qi UJ§§ ULU

m farara I gm“:am a) 11TH:am i {é}arari a

’

i was

fir£ 1 1 16 I FLT-i II

UUfifi U‘

UE—E‘

] [U UU«S

‘

gra ze: WE I £ fi=I 11TH : a {m uff anwarn I a££ I I I'j

war-Irfin I an tfi'

flffil I I9 A

UH{3m (aft-o; a t? EUQ}? EU

I SO DE ; A om o s BS

B £ £

Cf . L as s . In s t. p . 3 2 7 .

5

B flg thi oughout .6

DE am id}as; and

sim ilarly in C om m .

7O

A BC {g a ff-q .DE fia ffiq; W (and the

Prakr . Sanj iv .) fiarfiq— if {a be correc t

,it m u st be the enclitic

form ( Cf . L a ss . In s t ., p . 3 2 8) but it is probably a m i s take for 13in

copy ing from a MS . in the B engali character .

8

W {I m DE

seem to give at}? as a new S I’

i tra,and add to thi s in its Com m .

Wfirt m fi ai m.

”

M ss. 3 ! here in the follow ing sIIII-as D

I I we : I I R

§£ 2 z w e: a t?! Ut a : F13 2 F312 {Fam arwfi Hard : I I

71235 £ m 2 r I 2 2 £ m 2 r I I

mi §£ 2 z um EFT m u2 i r were I‘

flfi TT TFL Ea?

512 I I afi fiatarfw I I E 2 5fiam fin I I

gmw ifi t z rfie £52 6 2 7 : as?FIT! am ! at? {FER £ r

2 m néfa I I g r I I a“: amam ! 2 2 aI£ I I fie II 3 2 FIE am ;

ail Fa£ I I

W2 : 11 2 121 an? egg a? we"

( 65a £ I 2 m

Haifa I I 73113 112 I Fig aw fi aem w‘

I I

£ Tfir~afi mai fi r£ £ TU §£ 175 i f an? WE I 2 2

fi arar2 £2rwaa : I I 2 I 2 am?I I 2 £ 1? I 2 2m? I I

m fg : £ 1312 : 112 1 3: mm :m am 2 f rwar-

«I I I F3 “? I I

fiIfia are? §£ 2 z new fi fié F52 1”

? afifié“( fi e £ r

2 m Rafi I I Ffi ffi'fi f‘

s‘

6 2 62 an}I I

generally has 13 ,the o ther MSS . 3 1 ( Of . iii .

,\V generally write s

{a forq.

1

7-

51 3; plain in CEVV A B not clear,excep t in one ex .

D reads Ear, correc ted in the m argin to an; only D has avg , the

othe rs aah2

\V adds a ant rasgzfig“a .

8

So MSS . pla inly ; D as

1 8 I I HTQIHHHTT‘I I ! I I

s i t 23312 :We: a‘

fi i‘r$ 172 2 am gm

{FER £ r2 m wéfi I I H‘fil’ w a i t I W } 2 3112 ? 73m g

awfz £ m 2’

i I I a arm a : I I

3 512 : t12 m ti'

a zflafi a'

a

'

fi wfis fi rfiz‘fii m tg

-

(ii

arar2 1i‘rm m : I I m tfi fii

‘rae rg

’

afi £ TvI2’

I I I

£ rfi1un i? um i i 2 m m?ne w?{fire £ I 2

m wa‘

fif I I i t em? I 2 em’

I fi rd m mi ani I I

3 5 12 : we 33 are :mafia “are I I flnfiaPa l I Ifla wfi nuam f

‘r sun2 m fiat-( I I I

gm : um aaflfi afi Frag {fiarar2 fi

was : I I fi g firs“: I FJ£ I I

£ £ 2 z 1q2 e i t“a? i ‘

£ 3? £ 1 2 317 was I I“é £ 2 £ 2 131 I I

before, fi g ,

corrected in the m argin ; only D Q for 3 1 in the

second form .

1

E D a'

ah'

R iff, but B not so originally .Q

AW

-

g"q; as a com pound ; Cf .

s

So BDE ; A has a} 5}“rd

m flTfiWSW él' ti}Em m rw rfiqand sim ilarly in the

C om m . of each .

4qé—

‘

a a'

fa not in A Cf . S . 30. 5

So BDW (and

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

1 2 IIWTEWWFTN I II

£ 2 12 : 11 2 2 1 fiifii £ 2 f2 2 2 12 2 12 221 2 2 f2 II£42 2 2 £ I I

£ 2 12 : 112 2 1 2 221 11 2 2 11 2 £ 12 2 1 2 2 12 I I 2 2 2 1 12 1 I

2 2 2 i I 2 2 1221 2 2 12 2 2 1F2 1 12? I I

£ 2 12 : 112 2 1 2 1171 112 2 £ 2 2 2 2 1 £ 2 12 2 1 2 2 72 12 1 2 11121

2 2 2 : I I £ 2 112 2 £ 1 2 12 2? vi 2 i I I

£ 2 12 : 112 2 1 112 2 2 2 £ 12 2 1 wéfir I I 2 2 2°

I 2 2 2 2

2 2 1 2 2 I I

£ 2 12 : 11 2 2 1 £ Tfii 112 2 112 £ 12 2 1 I I 29

2 -3 ( Fr£ 2

£ 2 12 £ 12 2 2 I I £ 2 112 2 2 I I

£ 2 12 : 112 2 1 2 21 112 2? 2 2 12 1 2 2 112 32 2 2 12 I I 2 12 2

F112 I I g i f t 2 2 211 2 232 1 27 I I

£ 2 12 :“2 2 2 2 2 7 2 2 3 2 21 2 12 I1 2 2 : £ 2 2 2 2 12 1112 11?

2 2 12 I I £ 2 2 fz £ I I

‘

B a 2 2 i B om . S li tras 48 , 49 de san t in c .

3

B

WW W}.

5

BC om . 3 123; the Prak. Sanj . om . 31 2 5

and varies betweenqfi' and i t.6

BC Ha m} ( in one word) ;W 113 1]

qfi' E has no Com m . onl y D“a W m} which H em a-ch.

confirm s .7

337— 773 ? added from B ; Cf . S .46 .

8

D “snag .

I I 112 : 2 113 2 2 : I I i s

112 2 112 1 12 12 2 I 2 12112 112 2 I I 12 1 13 2 1 i i 2 2 12 2 12 2 1

aiam 112 2 : I I 2'

ir2 I $21

I I 2 1 2 i I 2 2 1 : I I

(2 11 2 2 2 fi1 112 2 : fa 2 2 1 12 2 1 11 2 2 1 I I fiifiia

l 272?

fii : I F-i g I I

E 2 3 2 2 11 2 12 1 12 112 12 12 2 2 11 2 2 1 12 2 1 I I 2 2 £ 1 1 1

2 1 I firm 21a I I 2 2 £ 11 12 1 : I 2 7 1212 2 1 I I

12 2 1-2 2 1 £ 2 12 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 112 2 1212 1 2 12 1121 2 112 : I I 2 2

2 11112 I 2 111 1 I I 112 1 21 2 11 2 I I 2 1 2 2 2 : I I 2 2 13 112 I

6 11 1 2 2 2 I 112 1 2 1 2 112 I I 221 112 2 I I

W siq 2 2 fi fiTfi fi ll? ( FEHTEITQQD

T

2 112 : II £ 2 1 2 1 2 2 112 1312 2 1 2 2 TH I 2 2 12 1 3&7

E 11 2 2 l l

1

Dfi g.

2

W ( and the Prakr. Sanj .) So W ; the o ther

MSS . fir .

‘

so CW ; the o thers fag ( 13 The Prak . Sanj . ,5

Sanksh. Sara , and H em a-ch. all have 2'

Cf . L a ss ,Ins t ., p . 102 . B

C ram ; D firQ BE fir? ( 8 50) W fiifi r ; Cf . L ass ,

p . 3 19 .

6

A recom m ence s here of. p . 55,n ote 2 .

7

W adds DIE T

{2

1 2 1112 2 1 2 2 12 2 1: I 212 £ 2 2 2 GIC8

A 2 throughout

113: I I 1115 711 111 1 31 : I I

11 1511 fz fi afi:ma ram m z e n}?1 3'

wafa I I

(“m

—arm? I fafi é tam

-vim ?! £11 1 I I

111 111:éqfifizra

‘aag afi I 3 16 11 11111:finfi Fat

3 111 .m 1fla 1fi ars“Rafa I wvv

’

flf? em f? I 1161

mare ag fé I‘

afiw'

fl 6113 111 I 3 11 11133 1 3 1 3 16 I Em ily111 3 3 I 1151 iiifi‘

amt”

? I I

fi Tfi'

fi T‘fiflTfli

‘

115“?n nan 11 1 1516

11: I I

wfiwfia m afia I smfiq‘r 311-315 1 I 3 17 1113 6113 3 I1511 1 131?

arazfi I I

“316 13311111 I wfia 111 11m fi m fi afi rz’

afi fi =1wafi I I

awfiféfi‘rm a fi a? 11 3 11 1 11 3 6 1 I 611 15 575 1 11

11511 111 3 111 firef'

rfaW W .m afi 3113111111 1 I I

1

A CDE am é gW a g ng’

B om . and confuse s the Com m . of SS .

2

So D ; A 133 13war .

S

W {mag the re s t fig Cf . no te4,

p . 57 ; m axW i 3 53 A agfii ;BDE m fg the other Gram .have

“A g am ma;

B50f v. 6 , 9 .

“W

added a to the S li t , and , therefore , adds errone ously here a am i

fafqa .

7

The MSS . haveM fg ,etc .,the anusw. being Optionally

added or not by S. iv.,16 .

8

AGDE (and the Prak . Sanj .) 11 ; BWWT ;

and s im ilarly in the com m . Cf . v . 1 2 , and L ass ., p . 3 10.

l l 1519 : I I 111 .

6 131 I am I I aam fi fi t”

? I aa rfi‘é‘r a i m}: aa r

m m fg I I

Fae} 112 11 I I rag aa \

H} fi rm -H Q m -w‘Q x

1 7

4“ 13. 5 1 1 it 2

2113

agi ffifi : 131151 ufitfiafi ifiaffi “NE !a

111m Q1”

? “WN W if? I m afia}

{fam ew 1 116 111111 151 aéam

1518 : I I

1

A “afla

’

f. A éqm D enq(but corrected in

I I 1115 11113113 : l l .

I I 3 12 1 111111 : I I

a finx'

rfiaafi éfimu ve1m {exag a'

im m i fr 111m113

2

1 113 11 1 11151 113 11 I I 11'

aFc1 az fi I 8 3 11 1 11 11? I I4"

m fiwxfiazfifi éa 1111151 FR 5?{fim fifir 113 11: I I 113

fi! 113 3? I 3 3 131 133 53 I I

“1 ; 13 11 13 6111111: E 113 finiafa I I 113

6

1151 I 3 1mm ( 13 1151 I I

313 3 afim m fi raw Q fi 3 1112 18

1 111 13 11 {1311 3 11

5511 1 Haifa I I m agm a I ( 151139

I waffa I 3 111 11 I I 11 1111 1131 II

1 11-

m m I m I nfifirum nq’

é mh 113 13 1113 1 1 11

‘

BD 11.”

The MSS . often readq-g of . ii ., 24.8

80MSS . ; it is

reversed in the com m . of S . 5 .

4

q§p not in A .

5

A fiq.6

A qgfiq,etc.

7

AW fa in sat. and com .

S

A BD {am a m} ; W m

3 11i} H em a—oh. and the Prakrita Sanj . have W and which

seem s be tter ; cf . S. 7 ; E has no com m .

9

The anusw. in these ex.

erased in A ; W seem s to have ( qr-f f, etc .

m

A DE W T ; B

1 1

um “W q ; of. L ass ,p . 3 36

,and infra . Sli t. 1 7. E

I I 3 1111 : afi‘

fi z : I I <1

11 11111 11 3 3 11 11111 fifmm’

r I fitqa t‘fit 1! a 37 5-11

21 1 13 11 11 3 113 11: I 1 11 1 113 11 11. I I 1 1111111 : I 111 11 I I

111 111 11 111 : I113 21 I I 13 11 1 111 1111 I 1 13 I 113 11 1 I I

1311 111 111 I I 3 111 sfi! I 311

111 3111 I I

fi m’

1133 11 111 1é : 111 3 1 113 1 3 11 1 1 : 1 11 11 1 113 1: I

1 11 3 : I I 1 13 1 11 11 1 11 13 13’

1 I 1 13 1 1 31 I 1 11 1 137'

I I 1 1111

1 1111 : 111 : I I

113 1 : 131111 £11 1 {1 11 {3 11351 113 11: I I 11111 1? urea ? I

3 f11 113'

m fi ffi 1 1 1 13 11: I I 1 111: I

1 13 11 1 1 111111 I 1 13 11 I I 1 11 1113 1 11 fi 313°

111 1 fi afi t im rm fi a

‘

fiw— naa : from BD ; A is ob scure here ; of SS . 1 , 2 , and

2 3

as m S . 1 . A 13 331111 : E 111 311 3 11 1 1111311 111 : 111 11: 1 1115111

M 111 ;4A A om . qin Sut. and com m .

6

W“a in Sut.7

and com m . ; B A give s the plur. ex. an 1 11511 3 11 5 B

has 1 1 15} throughout ; W adds sam yogap z'

crw izraswa/t Cf . iv .,1,

11

no te . Cf vm .,08 ; A m erely q uote s the SM . the re s t I S gi ven

11 I I 3 13 113 3113 : I I

13 3 1 1 1 3 3 113 13 111 11 11 3 11: I 13 13 11313 111 3 1 13 11 3 3 I I 1 1111

3 13 I 11W ? II

3 3 3 11 13 3 131 1311 3 3 3 1 13 1 11 31 3 1211113 13 3 1 113 11: I I

3 3 111 I 3 3 111 311 I 33 111 1 3 3 11131 "

1351 111 3 11111 1 1111 : 1 13 11 1 I“3 II 3 3? I 3 3 111 I 3 3 1113 11 1 1131 I 33111 I

'

33 111311

11133 1111 31111 3 1111 : 3 11 13 3 33 : 3 1513 3 1 : 11

3 11313 3 I I 31111111 I 3 f3 f3 111 I I wfiwfi I 3 13 3 111”

1113 3 11211 111 13 1 3 1 3 13111 3 111 131 3 11 I 1 13111 13 F113 I I 3 1

3 11fi=1 I 31 3 111 1 I 3'

1F3 fi1 I 3 13 11 111 I 313 1111 I 3 1135

111

3 3 1113 11 1113 13 111 1 I 1113 13 1 1 1: I I

1113 3 11111 111 fi11 11 3 3 3 1 111 : 3 1 : 111

11133 : 3 11131 13 1 3 1 I I

31 3 11 311 3 13 1111 1 I 313 111 1 I 3 1113113 I I

is given from BD ; W ab surdly m ake s a new Sutra of it beside s

having it in Sect . viii .1

DE 71 for 7 1 throughout.2

The MSS . vary

between 3 3 and 3 3 .

3

DW i i A {713B {a all have i

"

: in the

ex .

4A D fi .

5

A 11513"

n6

BDW add the p] . form s in7 s

qand 13, é lfll’

fle tc . W fin". D adds gfigm e tc .

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

38 l l WTE HHE TQ I II

fi ffi‘

fisfi I I 31 13 1 3 13 I 31 13 11

3 3 I

31 F3 =3 1131 I fi rm I am ré I I 3 11 3 113 : I I 113 313 1

fi wrfi m 3 33 3 3 3 3 13 33 3 3 13 3 1313 3 11

33 1 333111 1 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 1 3 313 1 3 3 3 1 3 3 1 3 3 113“13 3 1113 13 3 3 3313 3 1 113 13 3 1 3 3 13 13 1 3 1; 3 111 3 313

3 11521

1 11 3 3fi1 I I 3 3311 I 3 3 3 1 3 31 111 I I

3 33 151 3 11 3 13 3 3 3 3 135 113 13 31 3 13 3 1 111-3 3 3 1 3 1 3 11

3 133 13 1311 3 1 3 3 3 : I 113 3 31111111 I 3 33 11 3 13 3 1 31 3 1

3 13 511 I 3 3133 3 1 3 1 I 1131. 313 3 33 I I 13 3 3 13 3 3 3 1 I 31 3 1

313 11 I 1131 31 13 3 3 3 1113 I I 131

133 113 3 13 I I

W adds 43 41 31 3 13 3 11 5113 13 331 ;

the C om m . in B is c orrup t,but seem s W bo th further add vac/Wm

at full length .

2

Wm .

3

E add s fi fi aafifi.

4DE add 35 3

-

3 43 ;W ’

s ex are 31 3 3 3 3 I 31 13 3 3 13 I 31 3 3 3 3 , the'

last two w fi gqrfa . I t then adds wrfm mm fiamTz-éfi

WE T: B adds a very long Com m . applying these form s at ful l“

length to the poten t. 1 st and 3rd pre t 1 st fut. and bened .

5

W ay .

0W 3 3 3

7

W g g zfi'.

8

OnlyW has -aafi1‘

g a E has through

out adya for anadya CV L ass. pp . 357 , 3 58 .

9

W adds W IT ]?

here . BW add 113 33 3 3 51 511 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 111 1 3 13a nfi which H em a-ch. also seem s to allow .

1 1

So E D om . BW

I I Haw: ll i i

afim nfi'wz am

‘rffim fig a urm wm fififi a t

a nfifim m i fr at via-

Ii: I I afinfi I sea-cxf a n? I we?

1 1m in?I am e n; I"

6 1 W“6 3 3? I w

’

éfi'

m ff I I

W m m afi fiw fi'

g afi afira‘r a re}: 1m ?

fi wfi a m i fim fi fi a was : refit-Zia 113 was : I I 3 13?

d at a: I I am fla ir Prai a-i i Qat a r I 113 1155

SQQ’

T‘éfiE T: I I

add as ex .

“afa rfi as-n m fla t w ith the foll ow ing Sans .

expl 313mfi rmg ai t-rwag 31 3mm effi gyw arm s wam

i 165m aia m w e: am t fi ( E ffie: I s H em a-ch in his

corresponding Sli t. agrees wi th DE ,but adds anye éu anydsdm ap t

cbchfiantz'

liq/fa , blzcwa tz'

,bkcwet

,b/zava tu

,ablzcwa t

,abfit

'

t t,babfiz

’

wa,

bb t'

tydt bkavz’

ta’

bkavz’

shya tz’

ab/mm'

slzyadvd i tya rt/Lalz .1

DE qmfi a .

2

E gives ex . w ithout Com m .

3

Only W adds fi fe-(m fg; filta fg:fi g .

DE om .

5

w Ham ; B adds H'

éafi a'

cjetc .

,as in s. 20. 6

D ( not

E ) om . thi s Sli t , and m uch of Com .,but i t i s s uppl ied in m argin .

7

D gfiga ; E has i for e in all .‘

S

D aafi a .

9

13W om . and add

f a n aifim

A DE B {i f W has three Sutras

i ? Kiri I I afim arrg

'rfi

‘r:W W i i i a ri a : Q THJI

“ar

iflw I i s}? I 3m I as}? I I wm’

TaJ flufim $ 5a m

??UW T? l gE fi a s tmi r gm aaafi aaeurfm fafing

WTfil ; then follow “gag

-

fa} é}? N ( S . Q4) and ll

is I I nresanm : I I

a re? Em il : Ha w i v a nem i a? naffi I I sai l-

a

fi ft‘i II wi a I

m a uafr‘

éi Em il :Wi lm a i i? xww'

m QuT

w a

s

}II m ini II

aim qa fm fafiim fia {fa 1”

?a I I wrfiz “( rear I99e 3 3 II E lwin

-

ta r I wriflgg: I I

fw g mw naut é fi wi ll”

? I a ffirm ifi rw a a ria?

Haifa I I atri a: I“flirt I m 2 : II Emm i? I I m anta I I

fit? an?<ww €afiuafa I wan-( taggifi I Iw ee

a re? Em il : m am {i fz a fiu: I inf“?i f“?vfizaf I mfigf gran

“qfi (W in fact gives the var. readings of one S I’

i t. as

two) ; the copyi sts add anusw . wrongly , as if the rul e appl ied to the

past participle ( for which wide S . Of La ss ,p . 3 54H em a-oh.,

the Pr. Sanj ., and the Sanksh. Sara read firm. T he Pr. Sanj . adds

in Com m .,saw eskupum sbeskusarveshuvachaneslzu

,and expl . 61mm

by («z G13:and féfg:

A DE nfiafig fi a}; B g fé g ( of viii., l )

eras ;“g ait? n one give San s . expl . the Pr . Sanj .m .

2

A

F5 3 1 in S li t ,but in Com m . BDE {13 3 W (and the Pr . Sanj .)

3

fi g ; Cf. L as s ., p . 354. W adds rig—[flag

“flan?

“am ;

4Only in W W then adds a new S I

’

i t., a l fifl

'

i ‘

{1g 5

see A PP5

A onlym a’

l .fi

wQé7

B 371”

t all the ex . in \Vhave d .

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

i t I I m om enta : I I

U rn ; I I ane w sfire ml

fi rst ai a sa‘affine?

afifiz r afiefz r I I

a mrrfifi ura‘rsa qa

"

uafa at an?“a n

113 32 a'

iffirafifi I air-

a 3 1 W I I

{fit m am m ‘fifi gjfififi Tfl

Han: nfifi z :

‘

A B -g g ; Cf . i v., 24.

2

W g ig-eagffia

’

p

I I aw : nftfi k : I I tie.

I I arena“: II

a; warm ? I am WM 3 3 {fim m i fi Ham: i ts:

3 3 : I fi fe rial?! I I

35a : awn-

refit a {atri a}wafa I I s2e I I

HTi‘

Efl i’

E gait H3 a nem i a} Haifa I I w ar I

anew I uft m I I

fa t-TU await I we: m afia-

rat ( a w ai t? t iara I Iflat s I I

m ini?gt m am i‘

i‘rwafir I I aft ? I I

am 3 3 6 Iw a ra’

i s’

fia ( a nor3flwafa I I sita r I IQ

1

BW add several m ore ex . B corrupt ; W i ffi § 3h etc .

2

A g

BD W “337 ; the Pr. Sanj .

S

ED“A aim} ; D E m??a a a ?N

a

A am am . D for thi sgi t a

‘m : I I 51 am we:

{wrath war-

a I aim : warm ; E fiz z-fin : w ith ex . aim ;

«3 ° ll I ITEIFWE TW ll

gz BI G Iam ara

‘rfi n {waaréa

‘r Rafa I I when I

as ; aft-Ira Iwur'rfi'

gfm h‘r ti ara I I gni I I

Iw and}: ma {mafi a} tiara

Ffi é I I

a; “3 Iw ara’

t : m a m ari a} I writ? I I

aarfi am a : ( an? an? ( atri a? Ra fi II I ri ft

at I arm I i f?“II

‘

Q fl t ffifi m afi a : mm“at {arti st} Rafa

HR II E IW II E I at'

i n

gna w-

( Er I we: Hm}: WW an? an Hafiz“I I g ar I

a t ? II

WN

TQQ B has both Sut. confused ; W has firstgig}qfia ; w1th

eX l ite r i tem I M fr-

{a ffi x thenfif f aim : wi th ex .

fifim'

ct tfi fi'

mg ; the Sank sh. S . ( in Delius ) has mg qfiq the

Pr. Sanj . as in text.I

B addsgag

.

2

A ( not C ) y a“qfi m fi ; B

warn-fin8

BW ma g: W om . fla i r.4D 11g

“: thi s S li t. is sup

plied in m arg. of A ,but is in the text of C .

5

BW add Ina“;

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

M I I nram m : I I

fi ifiwfi I w m’

Ifififi m a z nm x I fi'

fi u

at“wai t I we: m a}: m W 525?was : I I tn:

fi at-43W I am urrfiérar-"ah m : I I am I arm : I I

m afi a-sir I w m fi fii m fii I I Fain? I I

a t wai ts-J'

s?I am: ara’

i sirmg‘rwan: I I am

a s : Sam arm fi: I w am‘rfim am fi wafi

Siva n

arwfi fiW fi I fi fim é? a s? I fi at m

m m rfia a rfi rwfifi um fi I é fi m fi fa I I

re st.‘

Wfis fi.

2

T his sat . not in A O ; in DE it follow s 8 . 2 1 .

3

BW a m . W of.Westerg . sect . 2 2 , 8 .

5

A om . B in“

for m una cf . L en z , A pp . Crit., p . 1 5 .

6

AW “fig (W a ) E a ;

the Pr. Sanj . Q and so in Com m . of each D 3 1 thr oughout in SS .

2 5,2 6 B om . Sfit ., but give s g; in Com m .

7

A 33 DEW as before ; B

om .

s

T his sat. not in A C W has only m m ; E for g has a

I I wen : I I e a

m a m a? ar an m {swi m was; am rra gfifm aafiam wfiwfm maafig m : I I a t? an : I a re: ar

a fi z: I a re w as I I i n? are“: I m a fi a I are a r

W I I m a: m are: I m fis: m a fi r I are m a r-r I I

an? an ti I sirg sis? I n i tri te}: m at {a ri a}

m m : I afim aafimfim raam I I a na l fi Tfi'K I (are

a m I a ffix? I a re I I

113 Tag a afi Iw a ra’

ifia’

i I I fin?

fi a fi afi Iw Warsaw} na fi I I fame: I I

gfi a g safirfi fi I am Em it : rem it Rafa I I

k a rat $13 : wrfi : faim i ‘flfi Ra fi II

tam? ll

( l ike D ) .1

T hi s S li t. not in A C ; B fi rg a‘

rz ifi : W reads S li t . g r

m fi'

i Q T Q T2

D G Tf§ 5 W 1§TI 5 D om .

3

80W ; B

m a ; D m fi .

4D om . Wflfi g gfi :

5

T he MSS . have 3 3; (W 3 )

here,but as A B have a in Com m .,

and E’s B engal i a i s clear, Del iu s

’

a i s probably incorrec t (a , a and a be ing so al ike in MSS .) the

8

M SS. have a in ex . (W a ) . D fifi‘

fli7

A fa throughout . W

3 : E’

fi'qfi'

at Uw ith ex . fa‘

ém; fiffi g g ; the Prak . Sanj . as in text .

II HTE HTWI'

W I II

arr aa rfiréfi’

mfi : I 9m H IM EFRI aga r was I I

I I

w a g-aw gmqm tfiw zfi : I

i f ?“at?! I I W e: I Hafiz? I I

m ar I are:watt-

« gm“en

-

ari a? wafer I I

f rat-

fl I I I

I a re £ 3 §flfi fi I am strafi ng-aw

are?wafit I I sham ? I M I I

are:1175}Iwwarm arm i

'

a’

i wafi IFM INE I

fi a i m fi‘rffif-Efi nafi ufiam n

1

A a n'«m ; C m q xfi}tam ; B corrupt ; for ”

an: Cf .

Pam , vi ., 4, 140.2

13 W g ei m g.

3

B m—‘

g.

‘

A m fg B

-

3 .

5

A m i}in set, but not in C om m .

6

A Hum:7

B mam“.

S

A fasffi'.

”

D a s ; throughout, to which B i s al tered from rg a

B I : but E r in ex. A B fim for “aft-an

. AW 3 ,D originally so

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

e a I I m ama-ra t I I

( mafia? (“fi at Hafir I I I an? I £03? II awfa

a s: I a aa’

fi wm a? ti ara I I 3 3 ? I ma ? I I

38 th at? I 312 1 3 1311 1315 I a m fi'

a'

a m“eawafit II 5 15 33

33 1? II

W IW a afi m z nw a Iw a n

E a arm I we: m a’

ta’

a w tefi t iara I I m a I I

as araa11n I a azfia

’

am s’

t nafii I I area I W ?

as? aah I afiam a’

h t Fafi’

ware I I am : I am ;

£332 fi at-113 I are aitfi I amateurs: at fwf“afarI I an

mes

s;‘

I were a m? I I

f 11 5 1o ows

Sln Com m BW

add ( a i

s”: e

tc W addsW

5& 1fi1’

. B throughout W So A CW BDE read

with ex . m g .

5

W affix W flfi i‘fi’é : the lrz'

is a

later add . in BD,but the orig. text of A E the Pr . Sanj . has

7

W adds 1 1mg: gang aw {2 13 (

of . var. lect. S . 8 ) and

th8

en gi ve s S 58 A me g ,E B BW 11

53 31,the Pr San) as“

I I wan : ufifi z z I I s o

ari a-

arm titanwire: fisa aafi 3 1 I Iqfiréa I 1m m : I I

315i {Tiram f mt am flfig w ar3? a a in‘t 3 3 1? I I

$11 6”WW}, I aha-

rsei I I faa : I'

éfi a Isa; I I ( a: I

(“raga I f rag; I fi v e

-4I I

{I m a I 35 m are-rr I fa ad? I aft$ 61 I 331 an?! I

afi'

fim fiffia :“ha m : I fi sh: aah I I g aa I 3 a? I

ra ms: I gag

s; I gaa I I

as? m afia’

h’

ai wag :‘

Wfifififl: I I am v i ma I I

W w a r? I 3 331? g ram I Fa i r? Farm s-

ta I am :

grm-Era I Elsa; afa

'

a féi I

quoting 20. 1

So DW ; A B“sni f f-Era fi

l

m-fl; E om . Com m .

only W give s an ex . bes ide s “q.

2

So D ; A BE 11 251313: Wqfiaa g:

WW I faafla a fiftfi iaa W adds Efa fi afi WVWITi l ? afi’

g' “

Jay'

s-

é, but -fi‘ in the other ex . DE have a in all

h5

t e ex Cf 1nfra,transl note W s

ag fraqzzg

‘

rqfi'

g a g ( sz c

placed after 8 . BD e m}; W g r'

fi . W a g : 3 2,—

Q.

8

W0

10“Fil l?

9

W Hraaifiqfi'

; as an adfiz’

lzdm W ith no ex. A

fi g D corrupt . A B 3 but onl y B a in the ex. D om . bo th.

1 3“7 puts thi s S li t . after S . 5 2 with ex . 715 13: ( W? am? 717 1? I n?

9 1: ll E l i’ififiafl‘fl! II

m afi a?errata?ran? at flafif I I 7m m afim ra I ( ma

arr est: I area ate-sa g: I I m axi? I await I W WI I

Fara 3 11 13 13 3 I am am’

i féafi Rafam afi afi : I I Far

aa fi a'

a I s aa fi aa a aa’

tfi rafifi wai t“H aitiman ia}: I I am : I fi ai I I

M afi a at wafer “m am-

( via : I I “flTr’

a’E fi

“an; explained byW fa Erqaffi Cf . vi l ., 9, Where all refer

it to the passive the rest om . San s . expl . here .

I

So A DE fig

with ex . ffi'

a'

g : BW have a diff. S1'1 t . B (and the Pr.Sanj .)

gfigféffi ag'

rWW I : ( the a written in B 33 ; of . Del ,

p,1 2

,no te ; the Pr. Sanj . with ex .W W am ; W

gamm a?3 5W : wi th 6 Xi s ? faraa

W ( and

Pr. Sanj .)“Eg g sha

3

A om .

4H ere follows a S1'1t. in BW ,

not in

A CDE ; B a? awa sh ( B 3 ) 3 1 I I“a t 3 13 51 2 13 I {arm 2n

a’

tasa ma {ant i-a}W : m am

-fiat : I am a i ls: I 1131

m faa a I gram I a rea ; W has a rgw’

tafi af t I I a n

enem a3a}arafim fi I W 1?a '

fi afi tra m: I am

mg'

g: a ri a5

W for thi s set. 1133677 3e n wi th ex .

tam Wag -sag: “

ta EW and D orig. ; A B {ga r here

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

t °II HTE H

‘

HE TQ I II

gnqa‘rg ift I ”am m a‘qas tgufiwas : I I 35 3

2

: I a m? I I

f li t fla il l 9m gfi flfitwfiwaarfi r Haifa I I 3a m:

I arm : I I

mg mar Iw m ér: at 3 3 61? ( if?!W flfit

arm a‘w l fi

’

tt t n

ima m?garaa‘m am i am Rafi I I 311132 I 3

35; I Ix K

I I “( fir“( flan m am mm m a ma

gives San .aréffi .

1

A ag CDE ( and Pr . Sanj ag W am0 0 02

a} ; the Sut . deest m B the Sanksh. S .

3m m} ( Cf . Del .) A

3

CDE as m Sut. Waflg

7

5mB om . WW ffi g fw

i m am : II with ex . a?“Iare ? I ti tan ti tans ; I“a im

-

ia II“3 I t al so adds fi g in the Com m . of . 63,note .

4So A DE

( the second ex . in A m ay be g a g ) B qaig t'

a rarfin z Wi th

ex. an I war? I I mafifa’

mafii $7 ; W has a irwav

a‘

cfirr: wi th affifm in Com m . and ex. HT Q I 3 13 13: I 7B“ll

waif}? BEW then add (suppl ied in a later hand in the m arg.of D)

11m m sfil I van m m m mm a a n sfi: Em m a rz m

d i ssent : I war 1391: W 313I (BW add m fié) I fua'

fi: m I

{$21f a n ? T he Pr . Sanj . give s thi s as a S li t . but its Com m .

c\

is very corrupt .5

BW forgag give

“gag: W refers both ex . to

I I aan z afi fi i z I I t r

I I an: aan : afi aéa'

: I I

aIfi-Ja rfi sa I ai aalrmr fam aa'

fi aflaficaaar: ag ar

aari ar fam aa—réi

aaiai I I

a?m aflairaram rfiiarrfia ag fi araai fi a afa I I

ara am I a; m a 3 m m) suai I I sa w? I a?m afia; Ha na I IFa tima I a?3 3 75 dfia

‘

afi I I a}fi rm m a’

r ara I a await :

m ag Hana I 35‘Ha mafia : I I

the passive ; BW ( and Pr. Sanj .) then add a new S li t . W'

s-[Ti m'

r

ag ai II ; W’s com m . i s “alfalfa Ha na

-UT : I a raam afi ar

E T: I a fa ara 33 ? I 8 3 ? I Gala

a‘raa I 35 ; am I ajaa air

—

a? I gaa an ; I m a a’

raa I

g aa (W ( a ) data I I aafa I g fi afir I aafiafir I m afia I 333 ;

I m ay I fi afif I II ; B’

s Com m araam a raaa

( B i i?) W e?I waa ra a aa'

a’

raa aga I m i nt : I wra:

(WT ? I afiara a aarié' ( sic ) a

'

rara a aara araa I a aarfa

Era:the Pr . Sanj .

’s C om m . very corrup t.

1

BD affizzi ; in thi s

book A D are chiefly foll owed, particularly in the ex . , where B

often differs,and W alm os t always W has several new Sutras ( see

A pp . ) and often a different order .

2

w8

So BDW ;

A E 3 73 3 .

“only BW give San s . cxpl both have avaa ,

bu t onlv

“C ? II HTQH

’

QETTN I II

A

Fax aw {aaraaart firfi arafifi‘

r aaa : I I 11afifi l I aa

33 99 I I mafia

airm aW 2 agaam asrarmfia a'

ag firm aa’

afi a afa I I

was

fi a a fia I I ararg { 545 12 I I

“i t fair Fara m arw fifa aTt-ar

'

afaun a-

a an ué

Fa I I was at al l i f ? I area fa r am aafizafi I W fire

fiafimafirs

I I 3 6 6 film %a 3 3 : I a m Fe m fia mafi a : I m i

first“: II

é ag I fi aafaaaia’

m a'

ag fi at-«m ari awaa

é ( stif f I HEW.

) Hag“If? II “13 “( Ti m I fit : (as! W T : II

mat m a area: a'

fiaé sir”

fi araaié‘r t iara I I mat amt

w m agal so .

‘

E x conject. A far-qQ3 ; (aw in BDW fi g;

1133 ! s E fa i r33 ; In H em -ch. M S a hasW?

1ai faw B

'

q'

W w

but I) “a for a ; the Pr. Sanj . fig ?)“73? Cf . L a ss ,

p . 1 89.

2

Only in B

W has as ex . 3’

f“6 11 ram I algae; afia3

So A BDE

B adds air{a wfm‘a I a: u'

oafi mmaa ai U) : W,as usual

,

diff.4BW om .

5

So BW A D 41 ; onl y W has any San s . expl.“w ar.

7

W t7afiIaS

So A ; BD om . ex

”

A a af -; B °m -5W

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

c g I I araraaarr‘a : II

an; Era {Quit agarawai t faaraa

'

fla

r tram I I a s: gar

agree: I as? faramt} wait I I arfir 133 i ag mfir I a% fih‘

a ar

afir I was? I I

a fa {Era a aa‘raware faaraai r

'

rwafa I I a t?! a? Hag

ar?

arm I fiaflaam nanfa arm I I

11 {Fai r area: fa r—arm filaraém aafir I I at firfim

’

r I I

firarj rasr: I I

l“I? I fa irI ar'a'a am : aa ramrfi a am—Qfag ram

Héfi rwaif?"Emm i“? i.

3 "T iff? I WW.

) ft 3 1? 17-

5 5}{g

fa? ll i‘

m mas-

a I I ara'

rsfir a? I fi re-PrsfiaFa

“? I I

fiara fiaa Fara am t am ?fi araafi m warn I I m m’

1

T hi s ex . corrupt in A D B as above W has Q'q 7 1313 fluff:

1 1‘

n2

H ere follows in B a new Sr’

rt . ( added by a later hand

in the m arg. of D ) not in A CE W gives it after S. 6 ; ma} ( D

a t}? throughout ) a ah“( B flgfi throughout )

w ith ex. arm ( B war) a ah arfirafis'

m ai ii 2 a I arm am

fih‘

fi fa I am arm am afisarrm ay?) m ar ;Cf BoehflSak

p . 1 1 , 1 7 , note for acvo, of . S . 10, sup ra .

3

A C qg ffiq,with no

Sans . expl . ( of . Va ,2 3 r) W diff.

4W 93

.

5

A C fiaafiqafaar ;B fw ffi mfi a r ; D altered from A to B in S li t , but not in ex . ;

I I aan : I I t a

fiaa I aarfifiaa I warn?fa=a a aa

’

r I I aaafira m m’

I I

am m a m a m ar—air fi arfa

'

fi I I arm wm gm a fifi'

art fir I I aim am inrra fara fi t‘

a I I

m ar-ram : i s : I am aam aafig

’

afaraafim fia'

fafir: i a

amm aaaaarz I fi a‘afim a fi at: I I

I I afa“affirm?araaam ‘i filaraém fir’

fira’

ra

aazaz afi fi a : I I

E corrupt,with no ex . ; W fiqafiq‘a fw ; H em a ch. has fira fi g

faa a a ram {are}3 12 A -qrfor -m°

in each ex.

2

T hi s Sut .

is only found in BDEW ( added 111 the m arg. of D) .3

SoW ; the

others om .

4W afim zfifi .

“Q I I arraaaarra : I I

I I averarm : I I

fur-am t m ar13am? I ara ari amam warM ama

arm :‘

fiar-

m : Rafa : air-( 3a? I fisr‘

rirat M m 3m

ma mam afi aai I I

adm it aw afié‘

rm mam f rafim aa'

r: m a

m ast araa : I I aaia I am I arm I farm-

I‘m

afis

é I aaaam Taar I fi fiar I aafi‘r I arqwi I aaiar

'

ru

gmfifirfit I I alarm? I ag

ar-ii I t a rfa: I I warm fafirFai l

ana l fi l'

rfz nand I fia I t rarr Ifi QT I arw I aaraaag

I

“m a

-3 m‘

rraa I ii-ma I aura I am r Ifi'

flTT-l I m a I aura I I

1

BDW always a n

2

So DW ; B A ( m arg. cor

rection ) .3

E has onl y the fir st two ex .

4A w ma

‘

f}( T) ; BW

m y{ma-fl D -fqrqfi .

5

BDW ai m. A aa BDW add

m a.

7

A D here add “er-

car expl . in D by arar ( but both are m arked

in D as spun ) ; B has a'

afi' wi th no San s . ; W om .

8

A 45 1:9

So DW

and A orig. ( al tered to {0B corrup t.10Only BDW give San s .

1 1

E x conjec t. ( as an ex. of Q seem s intended,al though properly it

should not be a conjunct) BD faa ft Wfi ne . BDW add

1 3

D adds agen Of . note 7 .

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

a : I I m am a-

m : II

ar-a’

I I are? I I

t raaa aada a t a fid a s fatar

'

aag arfia a-raa zrr

i a? a?drafa I I t rfirarW T I art-

am am? I‘

( rfirfir”

( Fae

I I

marg e: fit I I arm I ( find I far? I I

w arm vae akam ari a? Rafa I I m ad I m eta

wan-fa I I

W W t% aarar"'

firtrrrafi I I fie'

aarat a t fi! 5?aura I I

I I {Farart f'

aaaaraaam i Bartram am

am : affi x: II

‘

Bw a—anB

2

BD om .

3

E ar ; w figzgg’

ar ;

thegin A corrected to g in m arg .

4B om . fig W adds “5 .

5

AW

om . So D except “( ra t m? {a s A rrfiaar ( a t I arfi fa

arm s B arraar arm ( Tara?"

( Fifi f rag W ar

arr-

am"

( m r‘

I a re a s I I rma? rrara’

r I rang“( Tra

fiararr-

avg.

7

A am? ( added in m are ) ; B w e ( d ie ) ; W ( a ;

D em ; .

S

E anage. BT ’

W Eta .

1°

T he ee ly ex . ln BDBW

is rai nBD ( not in A B ) then add g arfig

“g ar z rfi fi fir; ( B

flfirfdii“g ar? fiz z {fa fiiwas; W has

'

a new S li t. Efi'

fi'

fa tfit rfa ar I I m afi a ara : fira m fa mari a? wafa I

g arf'

a B ar I mfi fa fit? I"

gafis I fira {fa fii‘ "

flai r I azafa

an}agqfifqggqr'

fi-S

n

A an“throughout .

I I um aa : I I t ax

II a ffirm a‘a : afim

’

éa‘

: II

m fiarat m arm am? I a m am m m ? fara'

a

arm m am : aafir: -rafaaa'

r I I

am a rrm z EU?! a? nafir II“Til l fam ‘a

fim a : II

am m am fi wafiruaraauarrafiu

flan? am w arm-

m am? Rafa I I afarm i I afi'aa ér

fira’

érI fi lfia I I aft-ga z I R h am I fi arm I firfit t II

‘

B t rap ; only BW have a Com m . to ss. 1,2 ; E gives only the

Sr’

i tras throughout.3

A BW m? in both ex. ; cf . 8 . 10. 3

A m agi ,

and adds m m 2 m ar. BD 3 m m ” L as sen ( p . 397 ) conj .

asp askgatd ; the Sanksh. S . has m andgucfic/zaryd/z .5

So MSS . A

altered to -q°

r; E om . S li t.6

A "

a? for Q in all the ex .

7

A fla g .

i

BW g r.9

Only BW give Sans ; L assen proposes qfiw : (p .

L ° ll araaaarm : ll

Baz aarm'

aag ar? a ara I I se é m ars? 1511 I I Baaarr

BIT? t in I I

W t fidfirrafi mfir ai r trafa I I arm I 3 1am I I arr-ii

gala : I I

m arr'

fim m fi nafirna m m a‘

m n“( ram I aa

“W I : H? 3 9? airarm “( fairm i araafir

755? 3 13 3 arm fia I I 3 13°

m afia I I

arfimgafifi I flm rrarm aar'

ca? t IT FI {affi rm-

Prm m1172 1 mag I I

‘

llfil

f

l

m m I 133 afar? I maarm s I I 11a“( rm

as gas : I I

I

A wry-

ré .

2

A adds g g gf m fg .

3

A D om . Sans . BW

add Baum-

era?( B w e ) m afiarfirfiafirar0) D“dz ; B-a f: but both -qin Com m .

5

A o for e ; W affi ; B $ 13 1“w ;

A BW give San s .6

MSS . -fi.

7

F rom BW .

8

BDEW ( and the

Sanksh. S . in L ass,p . 393 ) om . fl ag of . Sak .,

Will iam s’ ed . p . 2 17 ;

Boehtl . p . 242 .

9

BDW ( 13 3? gm.

1O

W a'

rfor a .

n

T he se ex . are

from W ; B has afirm m I mama? 3a gra m sA D“6 53?« an

{a arm ( D era am ) a?! are a(D afirgfiri ) 111 ! gram (

D

1133 afa i ) 1m“( Hr ( 11i am ) ; only W give s San s

4

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

3L ? II HTE HHEFTQ Z ll

m acaw : aar'

aarfai dram a t i st? wara I I afiaarfm are?

afi z rfi i m aria I I mg?an: I am aa : I I

tam arind-“am m a firm m aa m am “are: I I fi drm

m am? I m am"

? I fam arifm am? az arar

m am fa

I I "( firat t firafi araaam ifim am a !

Em ma: II

{55 13 3} Rafi I a far1

6 ? ( B H em a-oh. gives this Sut.

in his Sauraseni chapter . BDW -fm .

2

MSS . q3

°

Only In A .

4So BDW .

5

B =qfor ”

a t in Sut . throughout ; but not in ex. ; A

7

fawm ( d is

6

A B firs t . A -ar

I I arm : I I L a

are: m : a fié z

1

BDW g Book x1 1 . has no Com m . in A BCDE ; W gives a

C omm . but full of gros s errors , and of no authority ; Q’

f. L ass . A pp .

pp .49— 58 wi th the Sank sh. S . quo ted there several S li t. are very3

corrupt . B -a . MSS .3

313 1 , (D orig .

fa? ) BE add g ram

-

[f f

si r( added in m arg . of D ) and then give awifi as a new S li t . W

also divide s them ,‘HflTW Tflt I I arm a? afinrar am : a s?ani

aarr: am : I aradr? am i I m m:“a; then Ham-«fa?

4 6

a ge}; W gag5

So EW ; A fi t ; BD gar? sfir. BE

-gfi g .

‘

7

EW on “.

8

So Bw ; D m.l. ; A a g ar.

”

A zfi ; Bw

a} ;0HR D i f}; E a? ; of . L ass . A pp .,p . 5 3 .

-

10A fi'

m i ni s B { fa D“( fa were ; W -

afirfifi‘

éfifiz sb

only E { faai a’

rai z Cf . i i i . , a .

L 8 ll VTE HWQTW ! ll

I

A BEWW ; W 3 3 1.2

n ; A D gm :B a

n.

S

W fi ra

for fi t , with ex. mam a"

= aiqqnfi etc.

4A (1 513 Cf .

L ass. p . 54.5

W afigz ; E om . S . 1 2 — 3 1 .6

L assen’s conject. A C

{31 3 a? I an y a re ; B flz fi 3 I m a re“; D aar

'

fi'

é: I

33 1 1 {m a re W has two Sri t. rag-6 2 W W iii

?3 172

‘a? warn I Ba? ax? I fia

‘

arm I Bri a fit? and then

an a t? I m ara?: 3m m m”

: i? f

ar2 a? Rafa I

i fi f? etc.

7

1O

EW ( and A wéw : C afiq: D ‘qfi t ai ; E x con

jes t-s A DC faar Biz ; B firar BuW firfi a : II firfir ara

swarm: a m ix? arafir I afia ; H em a -oh.

“and the Sanksh. s.

A -'

g : B cg : CW -3 3 : D -

g :.{B

A -cg ”

9

A ra l .

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

a}. ll m iam laim : ll

{fit at t fiaa’

fim am a-

Ti Wha m ?3se

m aafilt fiam tfi fi ri ifla ami am

m a :

m m : I I

trm 3 13: it"( arffg am ffi .

I

A ‘fl'

fii2

L assen’s conject.

p . 58 ( of . ii., A BCD y a ; W jug-mi

}and in Com m .

W I fléiffiia i i

8

SO W ; A CD fi gm nag ( A has a m ark of

om ission over fir) B fi awm fig. Wq

F or H em a-chandra’s Sfitras on the Sauraseni dialect

,see A pp. C.

A PPEND I X A . 97

A P P E ND I X A .

[T he MS . W contains m any Sti tras, which are not found in any other ;som e seem to be taken from H em a-chandra or the Prakrita Sanj ivani, butothers it is not easy to trace to their source . Those which have already beengiven in the notes (as in p . 1 5

,note 4

, etc . ) will not be repeated here .

None of those which foll ow can have any claim to be considered as

Vararuchi’s, and m any indeed at once betray a spuriou s origin ]

I I RIM Ilwa'

ti‘rfm

“fi rm E ITHJI a t? ii i ? I

‘i ah

‘

T

“( Ti Herm i t aim : I fluf f {EI Tfi

‘

I I 1 I I

I I z im é‘ré : I I t i m {fiazfi z mfi “cairn

-

Ea : m m 3153:tw i rm éfifim wwrfi uw

fling-cit gé : I I Reta é sfifltgfi

‘t ar

e}?war?! I I I

fi t'

é a’

r I mfiqI I I fi a t?! I m fi'

flm rfiz‘ I I a I I

61q at I I fi rfi‘

g“Em i ram? art m ay firm?

(“I-

é I as} ar€r I I as?are: K a rt”

; I I 8 I I

I I {as a n?I I sag 11a W a ri a : wraflaflrrafi r

m w fi I I Ffi ’fim I Quart-a aft er I I a I I

I I as? sfir gar I I a m m fil gas wri st? Rafa I I 11g?

W II Q II

This is added after iii . 6 .

2 A fter iii . 9 .

3 H ere and often elsewhere Whas a double aspirate, which I have corrected . 4This and the next, afteriv . 1 .

5 Cf. iii . 5 8 .

6 This and the next, after iv. 2 3 ; both belong to Scot . xii .

98 PRAK R I T A PRA K A’

S’

A

I I wagflafi’

ti ra‘

I I m wm fi ré fi sh'

s I I war1m

ar gms I fia’

h fi I % né % am a‘

I I 9 I I

"a ssis t {I I I as?( T Q THJI um I I was : w as : I

I I 1r: I I

I I s ass I I wai t wai t I va

"“was"a. I I

W"figm l fw ’fi fffig

ll tr?flarfi mr‘

n

3m wa‘

fif I I a lfwrfa am I ennui } arm -

a I wfinfig ar

vfia I I 1 ° I I

I I amm é 3 13 a fi a t-i : I I G ina '

s-NW fig fim fi

a { l air}

if?new: m acaw slam : I am 3ITH {arr

u uu

I I summit 33 3

?

I I vfi airs? WW W fi es {tari f f

waft-r I I I w as I s traw I I um was: I as : I I a I I

I I I I Fa aft}I a m m a‘fi m i sfiwafs I Fans I I I I

° \ e 6

IJ tau-«war I I fir{a m at max

-

ti twafir I Fans firs t I I 18 I I

I I fitw fié I I w {am sh afts : a ( « at I I fi

rst s: IW 3: Iwist s I W T ? II 9A II

I I ftq'i i ts

fig fi I I for; i i : I ans art’

s-af t was : I I

w fiflrx I I vs I I

This and the two next follow v . 44. 2 A fter vi . 60. 3 The last S li t. inBook vi . ; a long li st of ex . is om itted. 4A fter vii . 24[of note to vii . 2 3}thi s $6 15. seem s unaccountable .

5 A fter viii. 6 .

6 This S i’i t. com es afterW’s

version of viii . 5 6 (hence the na-lcdm ) which in W foll ows viii . 14; [cf. Var.

L ect .] 7 This S li t. follows and restricts vii i. 1 8 ; the m being elided by iii . 2 .

8 This and the five next Sutras follow viii . 3 7 W al so has at’sam in viii . 6 3 ,which proves this to be an interpolation.

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

100 PR A'

K R I T A PRA K A'

SA

sw at fili a l? I I as I I

{i ma m wi thfi r !I as I I

a %vfima§ra=irg I I at

Ham il 1m Ra I I

airs taffs-i? I I a° I I

I I at I I

s ti mul i Qfifl'

I I a I I

( was? {fair51 I I 33 I I

availfi ffi in f-PI I I as I I

as firfifi I I 31 I I

913 : arm s I I 3? I I

fastm afi a: I I as

q t rs m afm qngéfi‘r: at

arf‘

fl'

Eff-

s : I I as . I I

a m ga z I I 8° I I

ain'

t stars: I I 3 1 I I

1 Thi s and the next after ix. 3 ; I om it the Com . and ex. as beingneedless in Sutras on m

’

p dtdh.

2 Of. i . 14. 3 Thi s and the next, after ix . 8 .

4A fter ix. 1 3 .

5 This and the rem aining Si’

i tras are inserted after ix . 1 5

(being im m ediately preceded by the Var. L ect , of Sut. 9, gm . in notes) . 6WithCom m . da lcskinaéabde ddlzz

'

no m’

p dtyate m’

lcakyena da’

hz‘

gwp a/varpo.

7 F or thi s,of. viii . 6 2 , note ; the ex. gi ven is hitflmm dat

'

tln’ma rdam bkitdsm z’

drislztwci

ra’

j dnam .

e The Pr. Sanj . and H em a-ch. both al low butter to be used in thesense of ablaz

'

mukka ; cf. A ppendix B . W’s ex i s huttam gaam .

A P PE A D I ZX 15 .

A P P E ND I X B .

ON P A GE 3 5 ( I V. 2 5,COMM ) .

T he passage enclosed in brackets is only found in A C and stands in A

foll ows

arm W a g]

; 317i} ( altered in a later hand to -a})”

(air

{ aah afam l agar}? I aa rm aq'

f m a : fifaég agwas'

a

36 11 5?was I m afia aura I afim ir E mu-{vat aafa

nag-

arm : ”f atal I fafifwa I afar-a I s tra ta I firs

-

a I a‘

fl’

t‘a

aaa aw arr-g: I afaatia2 a? ax : a {ma ararsfi r I aa

a? I an a reas : a : I a m? anal am t : Whats}: I1

C -m’@

“tr

-fl} HI2

C m a .

8

C sfirfi' but a n in next l ine

C has no o ther Var . L ec t . worthy of notice .

T he division of the passage into'

Sli tras (proposed by Prof. L assen, cf.

Inst.,p . 93 ) i s Open to several objections l . The silence of the MSS . BDEW ;

there being no instance of a Sti tra, m uch less of several Sutras , being found inA C a lone, although the other MSS . contain Sutras not found in A C. 2 . T he

two MSS . them selves do not seem to give them as Sutras, as in every in

stance, if we separate off a part as the Si m, the Com m . i s thereby renderedincom plete . 3 . The passage needs hardly any alteration to run at once intoverse, wi th the exam ples interposed between each l ine ; wi th the exceptionof the last two lines, of which m ore presently .

A s printed in the text, I conceive the passage to be quoted by theSchol iast at the end of the Com m . on Sut. 2 5

, for it shoul d be borne inm ind that the first three verses still refer to the affix m atzqa, which is theSubject of that Sut ,

and the fourth seem s only added because other Gram

102 P RA K R I'

PA PRA K A’

S

’

A

m arians ( fig/angle had introduced a pronom inal affix, which the author ofthe verse m aintains to be m erely a provincial ism .

The Prak. Sanj . in the course of its corrupt Com m . on S I’

i t. 2 5, gi ves

appullam and pum’

llam ( explaining the form er by citm ig/am , and the latter bypwroblza/vam p aum styam ) and then adds B luwettdm ( sic ) m am/490mayd ay/wd/cdm stu tathd kwackz

’

t ; hanum d, lum um anto ; sanklzydg/dk kritwaso huttam

dbkz'

mulcbye drz'

éyate ; p anchafiuttam , p anchakrz’

twas chkakuttam skat

lcrz'

twas saafiuttam satakrz'

twas ; p z'

ahuttam , p riydbfiz’

mulchm {sktauloz'

myat

tadetadbkyalz p am’

m dne ttz’

akau( ttz’

addakau? kettz’

am , I melda/lam , lcz'

m p ari

m dnam asyw lcz'

yat j ettz'

am j edda lzam , ydvat, etc. These do not appear to begiven as new Sutras, but follow in the course of the Com m . A fter thesecom es a new St

’

i tra, Swdrtl w [so act a sm z’

nartke p rdtz’

p adflcdt [cap ra tyayo

bl mvatz'

ed Mam a/m o, bhm m am , p alcslw bkam aro wi th other sim ilar ex.

H em a-chandra in a corresponding passage has the following Sti tras,

whi ch m ay have occasioned the introduction of the lines in Bham aha at all .

I I afi aa’

rsarfi fwaraagarga I I am : am m ini-

ra z

afi araraiar{FT-

rat {m am waf’

Fr I aaa’

aagesa I area

rafarai I araafirfi r‘a I aaraag fi‘

rat I

I I ratifi e s afira fafiaa é z ar: I I aa’

fiiauW WW ararrriré raa

‘rair ( 8 1

°

C ) Fa rrafar-

a {fi rst aga {swi m

aafi-r I aa'

gaga I {aura-s: afi ra

‘

as?! I firwualt-

ra g}.

fafiaai sass etc o

I I araa’

r g arI I with ex . awe-vi aaars a i I m i faarfir

5a faa s a'

r I a ffiraa fiia s a me-Ea a faarfir I

I I a rfiaafiararéaafifi t aarwar: I I

One ex . of m anta is hanum anto, of We ( sic ) m dnaitto, of ion , gaaw’

ro, of

m am a,dhanam ano ; then com es Iceckz'n-m a

'deéam ap ickckkantz

’

, Izanum d .

A fter three unim portant Sutras we have

I I fisagafi 1 13 I I zfi s'

ii ara : aft {a rearass ra sh

w ri t aaa : I gfia a lga}ete

3“T his sense of abkimukka is given to kutta by Hem a-eh. also, see infra . Of . the

spurious Silt. of W (No. 38 ) A pp . A .

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

104 PRRK R I T A PRA K AsA

A P PE ND I X C .

HE MA -CHA NDRA ’S CHA PTE R ON THE sA URA SENi DI A LE CT.

[A s the twelfth Section of Vararuchi has no Com m . and is therefore inseveral places corrupt, I have added an abridgem ent of H em a-chandra’s corresponding rules from the MSS . 200( a ) and 1 7 1 ( b) in the Walker Colleetion in the Bodleian . Thi s and the Sutras of the Sanksh. Sara (L assenA pp.,

p . 5 1 ) are of great use in correcting Vararuchi . The num bers afiixedare given from 6, whi ch num bers all the Sutras . The Sauraseni Bhasha takesup SS . 2 60— 2 86 of the fourth Pada.]

TO DO m in im SA URA SENYAM A YUK TA SYA . ( 2 60)Saurasenyam bhashayam anadav apadadauvartam anasya takarasya da

karo bhavati, na ched asau varnantarena sam yukto bhavati (Var. xii .

A DHA S K WA CHI T .

Varnantarasya adho vartam anasya tasya do bhavati, kwachill akshyanusarena m ahando, andeuram .

vi nns TAVA T I . ( 2 6 2 )

With exam ples dava, ’ tava.

’

A AMANTRYE SA U VENO NA H . ( 2 6 3 )

I nc nakarasya am antrye sau pare akaro va bhavati ; bho kanchul a ,pakshe bho tavassi . ( d i s optionally substituted in the voc. for the n of

words ending in in.)

MO VA .

A m antrye saunakarasya m o vabhavati, bho raam , etc.

BHA VA DBHA GA VA T OH .

A m antrya iti nivrittam ; anayos sau pare nasya m o bhavati , bhavam ,

etc. (I n this and the preceding rule the final m becom es anuswara ; cf.

Var. iv.

A PP END I X c . 105

v.& RYYO YYA H . ( 2 6 6 )

Ryasya yyo va bhavati ; ayy'

autto, pakshe ajja (cf. Var. iii . 1 7 ; x .

THO DII A H .

T he Com m . adds ‘

apadz’

rdau’

(Var. x1 1 .

I I I A H A CHOR B A SYA . ( 2 6 8 )Db i s substituted for the h of iha, and the Prakrit suffix of the 2 d pers .

plur. im perative (which H em a-ch . call s Izaak cf. Var. vii . 1 9 ) as I dha or iha,

here B odha or hoha,‘

be ye .

’

BHUVO BHA I I .

The Com m . adds ad with ex . bhodi, hodi ; bhuvadi, huvadi ; bhavadi,havadi (Var. xii .

PI’

IRVA SYA FURA YA H . ( 2 70)The Com m . adds aa’ .

xrwx I A DI'

INA U . ( 2 7 1

With ex. Bhavia, bhoduna havia, hoduna (the MSS . have z’

ya for z'

a,

but both frequently write y for a ) pakshe, bhotta, hotta (Var. xii .

K R I GA IIIO DAB UA H .

A bby-[rm parasya k twapratyayasya dit adua ityadeso bhavati ; gadua,etc . (Var. xii .

DIR I CHE CHOH . ( 2 73 )

T yadinz’

tm adyatrayasy’adyasya

‘

ichechz’

rv iti vihitayor ichechos sthane

dir bhavati , veti nivri ttam ; dedi, bhodi .

A TO DEsCHA . ( 2 74)A karat parayor ichechos sthane deh (chakarad discha) bhavati ; gach

chhade, gachchhadi ata iti k im ,nedi, bhodi .

BHA VI SHYA T I SSI H . ( 2 76 )

T he Com m . adds ‘

hi ssaham apavédah’

(of. Var. vn . 1 2, 1 3 ) with ex .

Bhari ssidi , gachhissidi .

A T O NA SER Di noni nri. ( 2 76 )

A k ziratparasya nases sthane ado aduityadesauditan bhavatah (of. Sanksh.

Sara,9 ; and L ass . A pp.

, p .

I DANIMO DAK IM. ( 2 77 )

( Cf. Var. xi . 1 5 , Var. L ect . )TA SMAT f . ( 2 7s )

106 PRAK R I T A PR A K ASA .

MO ’NTYA NNO VEDE TOH . ( 2 79

A ntyzi n m akarzit para idetos parayornakaragam o vabhavati .l

EVARTHE YYEVA .

H ANJE CHE TYAHWANE . ( 2 8 1 )

(This and the rem aining Sutras refer to m’

p dtdh.)

HIMANA HE VI SMA YA NI RVEDE . ( 2 8 2 )

NA M NA NVA RTHE .

A MMA HE H A RSHE . ( 2 84)H iH i VI DI

'

ISI I A K A SYA . ( 2 85 )

SE SHA M PRAK RI TA VA T . ( 2 86 )

o o o o o 0 O

The ex. gi ven are z-c re, Juttam n1m am , Juttam m am ,e-lcdre, kIm

nedam ,kim edam , evam nedam , evam edam .

’

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

08 THE PRAK R I T A PR A K ASA [sxcr I .

sini ; padivaa, padivaa; sarichchham , sarichchham ; padisiddhi, padisiddhi ;o

pasuttam , pasuttam ; pasiddhi, pasiddhi ; asso, aso.

SanskritSam riddhi ,

‘prosperity ’

; prakata,‘

m anifest ’; abhijati ,‘

fam ily ’

; m ana

swim ’

,

‘

a w ise wom an’

; pratipad ,‘

the first day of a lunar fortnight ’;sadriksha,

‘

1ike’

; pratisparddhin,‘

a rival ’

;1

prasupta ,‘

asleep ’

; prasiddhi,‘

fam e’

; aswa ,‘

a horse .

’

This is a class of words which can only be determ ined by observing the

form s used in classical authors.

I DISHA TPA K WA SWA PNA VE T A SA VYA JANA MR I DA NGANGARE

SHU .

I n the words islzat, etc., 2

° is substituted for the first a . The optionally ’of

the form er rule does not apply to this .I si, pikkam , sivino, vediso, viano, m uingo , ingalo.

Ishat,‘

l ittle ’

; pakwa,‘cooked ’

; swapna,‘sleep ’

; vetasa,‘

a ratan ’

;o i

vyaj ana, a fan’

; m n danga, a drum ’

; angara, charcoal .’

L OPO ’BA NYE .

I n the word araaya,‘

a forest,

’the first a is elided : as

,R am am .

n SA YYADI SHU.

I n the words éayyd”

,etc.

,0is substituted for the first a .

Sayya , a bed’

; saundarya, b ’eauty ; utkara, a heap ’

; trayodasa, the

thirteenth ’

; ascharya, wonderful ’

; paryanta, lim it ’; valli , a creeper.

’

O BAD A RE DENAI n the word badara

, the juj ube,

’

the first a,with the letter d (including

its inherent vowel ) , becom es 0,as Voram .

L A VA NA NA VA MA LL I K A YOR VENA .

I n the two words Zaeana,

‘sal t,

’and nacam a llz

’

kd,

‘double jasm ine,

’the

first a , wi th the followm g 7) ( including its inherent vowel ) , becom es0: as,L onam , nom alle

'

d.

2 Such is Vararuchi’s explanation, of. iii ., 3 7 ; L assen (Prak . I nsti t. p .2 6 5 , note) preposes I m ay add here that in the first fourSections I have generally foll owed the MSS . in gi ving the Sanskri t word inits crude form , whil e in Prakrit it appears in its nom . sing , as m odified bythe rules of Sect . v . This chiefly applies to the term ination o.

se er . 1 ] O F VA RA RUCH I . 109

I LAYriRA MA YriK I I A YOR YWA VA .

I n the two words m ag/72m ,

‘

a peacock , ’ and m at/M lle ,‘

a ray,’

the firsta,with the syllable g/z

’

t,becom es optionally o : as, More or m m

’

wo,7770720or

m a z’

d zo.

CH A TURT II iCHA TURDA sYos TUNA .

I n the two words chatartki and c/za tm 'da éé,the fourth ’

and‘

fourteenthlunations

,

’

the first a,with the syllable ta

,optional ly becom es0 as

, Chottlzi

or chafi ttlz i,ckoc a/I i or cfiauddalzi.

A DATo YA T HADI SHU VA}

A i s no longer im plied [see Sutra in consequence of the change of

sthdm’

n or‘prim itive elem ent.’ I n the words yafltd, etc .

,a i s optionally

substi tuted for d .

Jaha , j ahz'

t ; taha , taha, ; pattharo, patthz’

tro panam, pauam ; talaventaam ,

talaventaam ; ukkhaam ,ukkhaam ; cham aram

,cham aram ; paharo, paharo ;

chadu,chz

'

tdu; davaggi, davaggi ; khaiam ,khaiam santhaviam

,santhaviam ;

halio , hfI lio.

Yathz'

t, as

’

; tatha,‘so ’

; prastara ,‘

a bed’

; prakrita,‘

low’

; talavrintaka,

a fan’

; utkhata, dug up ’

; cham ara,

‘

a chowris ’

; prahara,‘

a blow ’

; chatu,‘

fiattery’

; davagni,(

the burning of a forest ’; khadi ta ,‘

eatcn’

; sansthapita ,

placed ’

; balika, belonging to a plough .

’

I T SA DADI SI I U.

I n sadd,etc .

,i i s optionally substituted for d : as

,Sa z

'

, sad ; taz'

,tad ;

j a i, j ad .

Sada,

‘

always ’; tada,‘then ’

; yada,‘when .

’

I T A E T PINDA SA ME SHU .

I n words like p iagla , e is opti onally substituted.

for i as,

Pendam, pindam ; nedda, niddz

'

t senduram,sind I

’

Iram ; dham m ellam ,dham

m illam ; chendham chindham ; venhu, vinhu; pettham , pittham .

Pinda, a lum p nidra,

( sleep sind I’

I ra,

‘

red lead ’

; dham m ill a,‘braided

ha ir ’

; chihua ,‘

a m ark ’

; vishnu ,‘Vishnu ’

; pishta ,‘pounded .’

T he word 8am a or‘

like, ’ i s used to indicate that the rule only applieswhen the z

' i s followed by a conjunct consonant (as in

A T PA TH I I I A RI DRAPRI TH I VISHU .

The Prak . Sanj . constantly uses this s I'I tra to explain the change of dto a before a conj unct ; as in achchhcra for ( ischarya .

1 10 THE PRA K R I T A PRA K A

'

sA [sxc'rx 1 .

I n p athz’

n, etc .,a is substituted for z' as,

Paho (or in its crude form , paha) , haladda, puhavi.Pathin,

‘

a path ’

; haridra,‘turm eric ’; prithivi,

‘

the earth .

’

I TE ST A H PA DADEH .

I n the word iti,‘thus, ’ when at the beginning of a sentence

,a is sub

stituted for the III which follows the t : as,I a uaha annaba

-vaanam ,ia viasantiuchiram .

I ti paéyatanyathavachanam , so behold4the hypocrisy iti vikasantya’s chiram , thus blossom ing a long tim e.

’

We infer,from its being restricted to the beginning of a sentence , that

the rul e does not hold in such a case as 1950ttz’

,priya iti.’

UD I K SHUVRISCHI K A YOH .

I n the two words t'ksku,‘

the cane, ’ and wwche'

ka ,‘

the scorpion, ’ a i ssubstituted for i : as , Ucl w/zlu't , c ine/flaw.

o CHA DWI DHAK R INA H .

0is substituted in the word dwidlzd when used wi th the root trim,and

as al so, since we find c7m in the Sutra . Thus,dwz

'

dlzdlcrz'

tam ,

‘bisected , ’

be com es dokdz'am or m ama ; and‘it is bise cted , ’ dokdg

'

jjai

or dukda’

jjai.

iT SI NHA JIHWA Yosa .

I n sz'

nlza, a li on,

’and j ikwa, the tongue, ’ 5 i s substitute d for 8

°

as,silzo,

j ilad . The visa is used in the Sutra to include other words which are not

m entioned hence there is an i in such words as c isattlza, aisam bha, etc .

, for

viéwasta, trusted, ’ aiéram blza,‘trust

,

’etc . [The com m entator, therefore,

woul d seem to bring under this rule the various instances where an whichwoul d properly in Prakrit be followed by a double consonant

,is exchanged

for an i, and one of the consonants is dropped] .

I D frA II PAN iYADI SHU.

I n paniya, etc ., 8' is substituted for the first i as,

1 The first of these exam ples is very obscure . Uaka or w alla i s a singularword, which i s found in the Bengal i recension of Sakuntala [see Boehtl ., p .

There i s no rule for it in Vararuchi , but H em achandra [8th adhy .,

2 md pada] has the foll owing : Ua pasya ; ua iti pasy’etyasyarthe vaprayok

tavyam ; pakshe pulaadayah’

[of Var. viii . L enz , therefore, rightlycalled it [Urv. p . im perativaquzedam form a vulgari s lingum .

’

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

1 1 2 T H E PRAK R I T A P RA K AS’

A [see n I .

Trina,‘

grass’

; ghrinz'

t,

‘pity ’

; m rita,‘dead ’

; h i m,

‘

m ade ’

; vriddha,

vrishabha ,‘

e bull .’

ID R I SHYADI SE U .

I n m’

skz’

, etc., 8° is substituted for the initial as,

I si, visi, gitthi, ditthi, sitthi, singaro, m ianko, bhingo, bhingz'

tro, hiaam ,

Vlm ho, vinhiam ,kisaro , kicheba, vinchhuo, sialo kii, kis1

'

, kiva.

B ishi,‘

a sage ’

; vrishi,‘

an ascetic’s cushion grishti,‘

a cow that hashad one calf ’

; drishti,‘sight ’; srishti,

‘creation ’

; sringara,‘

1ove’

; m riganka,‘

the m oon ’

; bhri nga,‘

a bee’

; bhringara,‘

a vase ’

; hridaya,‘

the heart ’;vitrishn a,

‘contented ’

; vrinhi ta,‘

grown ’

; krisara, a kind of pottage ’

; kritya,‘

action ’

; vrischika,‘

a scorpion ’

; srigéla,‘

a jackal ’

; kri ti,‘

act’

; krishi,

husbandry ’

; kripa,‘pity ’

UD R I TWADI SHU .

I n M m, etc. , a is substituted for the initial M'

: as,

Udu, m unalo, puhavi, vundavanam , pauso , pautti, viudam , sam vudam,

nivvudam ,vuttanto, parabuc , m auo, jam auo.

Ititu,‘

a season ’

; m ri nala,‘

a lot’

us-fibre ’

; prithivi,(

the earth ’

; vri ndavana,

‘

a country so call ed’

; pravrish,‘

the rainy season ’

; pravritti ,‘

news ’;vivrita,

‘opened ’

; sam vri ta, covered’

; nirvrita,‘

ended ; ’ vri ttanta,‘

news

parabhri ta, the ko'il m atrika, a m aternal uncle ’

; jam atrika, a son-in-law.

A YUK T A SYA RIH .

T he syllable m ’ is substituted for the vowel‘aj z

'

when initial and not con

nflsflwi tha notben lettem as,

B inam , 1i ddho, richchho.

B inam ,

‘

a debt ’; riddha,‘prosperous ’; riksha,

‘

a bear.

’

K WA CHI D YUK T A SYAPI .

The syllable m ' is som etim es substituted for an ini ti al m '

, even when it isconnected with another letter as

,

E riso, sariso, tariso.

01 a , oI dri sa, such ’

; sadrj i sa, 11ke ° tadr1 sa,such .’

VB I K SHE VENA BUR VA .

I n the word art/cam , a tree, ’ the syllable m i s optionally substituted forthe initial with its accom panying a : as m i ddle, eackckko. The optionbeing here defini tely restricted, the change does not take place at all in the

case of the substitution of 07777, but it holds universally in that of [ch [seeiii .,

s E r'

T . L ] or VA R A RUCH I . 1 1 3

L RI T A H K LR I PT A I L IH .—O '

I n the word lt lm '

p z‘a, is substituted for Zrz' : as, K

'

ilz’

ttam . F romthe above substitutions being enj oined, we infer that the vowels m '

and Irz‘

do not exist in Pri krit.

E T A I D VEDA NADEVA E A YO II .

I n aedand,

‘pain,

’

and (10m m,

‘

a brother-in-law,

’2° i s substituted for e

as,m

’

and,diam . Since ‘

optionallv’ i s still im plied (from Sutra the

form s w and and (Zearo are also som etim es used .

A I TA E T .

E is substituted for the first at as,

Selo,sechcham , erz

'

Ivano,keléso, tellokkam .

Sa ila, a m ountain ’

; saitya, cold ’

; A iravata,‘

I ndra ’s elephant ’; Kailasa,the m ountain so called ’

; trailokya, the three worlds .’

DA I T YADI SH IVA I .

I n the words daz’tg/a, etc .,a z is substituted for the diphthong ( 1 5 : as

,

Da 1chcho, cha‘

itto, bha'

I'

ravo, sa'

i'

ram,va

'

i'

ram,va

‘

ideso, va'

ideho,karavo

,

va I Saho, va'

isio,va

'

i sam paano.

Daitya,

a dem on’

; Chaitra, the nam e of a m onth ’

; bhairava,“dreadful ’

;

swaira, wilfulness ’; vaira,‘

enm ity ’

; vaidesa,‘

foreign ’

; vaideha,‘

a trader ’

;

kaitava,‘

a cheat ’; Vaisz'

tkha,

‘

the nam e of a m onth vaisika,‘

m erctricious’

;‘ I

Va1 sam payana,‘

the nam e of a poet ’; etc.

DA IVE VA.

I n cla im,

‘

fate , ’ at i s optionally substituted for the diphthong a z’

: as,

dawam or I n the case of its non- substitution, the v is doubled bythe Sutra ‘

N i’

dadishu’

[iii . ,I T SA INDHA VE .

0 0 0 oI n the word gra nd/raw , produced I n SIndh

,

’

7, I s substl tuted for a z : as,

in DH A InYE .

I n the word d/Ia irya , firm ness,

’the substitute i s i : as

,D lziram .

ore’DVA PRA K OSE T HE K A SYA VA H .

I n the word p ra/tosc /za, the fore-arm ,

’a is optionally substituted for o ;

and, when i t is so substituted, the 7; becom es 7) as

, Pat'attlzo or p aottlzo.

A UTA OT .

0i s substituted for the first m e : as ,

1 14 THE PR A K R I T A PR A K AQA [se en I .

Kom ui, jovvanam ,

kotthuho, kosam bi .O 0

K aumud i , m oonl ight ’; yauvanam , youth ’

; kaustubha, VI Shnu’

s gem’

;I

K ausam br, the nam e of a e1 ty

PA URADI SEWA I'

I .

I n p aura, etc., at: is substituted for the diphthong (m

Patiro, kaurao, praii iso.

Paura,

‘

a citiz en ’

; kaurava,‘

a descendant of Kuru ’

; paurusha,‘

m anly.’

These form a class of words which can only be determ ined by observingthe form s used in good authors . I n the word lettuéa la , welfare, ’ the changeis optional : as, icosalo or ta il salo.

ACHCE A GA URA VE .

I n the word gam ‘

aca,

‘

respectability, ’ u is substituted for an, and so al soa

u0 0 I 6 .

1s eu as before (s1nce we find aka,

and,’In the Sutra) : as

, yam /0am or gau

ravam .

UT SA UNDA RYADI SE U .

I n saundarya , etc .,741 s. substituted for aa : as,

Sunderam , munjéano, sundo, kukkheao, duvvario.

l

Saundarya , beauty ’

; m aunjayana, a place producing the munj a plant ’ (P)saunda,

‘intoxicated ’

; kauksheyaka, a sword ’

; dauvarika, a porter, ’ etc.

1 I m ay here rem ind the reader of what is further discussed elsewhereviz .

, that in Prakrit there appears to have been no distin ction between a and

6,although it is uncertain which was the prevail ing sound.

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

1 16 TH E PRAK R I T A PRA K AsA [user 1 1 .

l t

W1 th a bow’

; apaj ala , w 1 thout wa ter ’

; atula, unequalled ’

; adara, respect"vt 6 o

apz'

Ira,unbounded ’

; ayasas, Infam y ’

; sabahum z'

tna, respectful .’

0 o 0

A s I llustratlons of what we m ean by s1ngle consonants, ’ com p are Sakko ,I o I o

m aggo, for Sakra, I ndra , ’ and m arga, a path and by non- l n1 t1 al ,’

com

tpare Kalo and gandho , for Kala, t1m e,’

and gandha, a sm el l .’

YA MUNAYAI I N A SYA . ( 3 )I n the word Yam zm d

, the river so called, ’ the m i s elided : as, Jaund .

SPHA T I K A N I K A SHA CHI K URE SHU K A SYA H A H .

‘

Non-initial ’ continues to be im pl ied . I n the three words sp ka tflca,

crystal,

’777777787777, the touchstone , ’ and clz z

'

lcura,‘hair, ’ 77 is substituted for

[we now pass from eli sion to substitution] as,1 777777770

,777777780, 07777777ro.

siK A RE BHA H .

I n the word Sikara, thin rain, ’ 7777 i s substituted for 77 : as, S ibizaro.

CHA NDRI K AYA M MA H . (6 )I n the word ckandr z'kd, m oonl ight, ’ 777 is substituted for 76 : as, Cl mndim d .

E I TWADI SE U TO DA H . ( 7 )I n etc .

,77 i s substituted for t : as,

Udu, raadam, éado, nivvudi, ziudi

,sam vudi

,suidi, a 1di, hado, sanj ado,

viudam ,sanjftdo, sam padi [padivaddi

B itu,‘

a season ’

; rajata,‘silver ’

; Agata,‘com e

’

; nirVIi ti,‘

rest ’; zi vriti,

‘

a surrounding ’

; sam vri ti,‘covering ’

; sukriti ,‘virtue ’

; akriti ,‘

form ’

; hata,killed ’

; sam yata,‘

restrained ’

; vivrita, opened ’

; sam yata,‘

gone ’

; sam prati,

now pratipatti, fam e .

’

PRA T I SA RA VE TA SA PA TAK ASU DA H .

I n these words,77 i s substituted for t : as

,

Padi saro,vedi so, pad

-eta.

Pratisara,‘

a servant ’; 2 vetasa,(

the ratan ’

; pataka,‘

a flag.

’

VA SA T IBHAR A T A YOR HA H .

I n casatz’

,

‘

a dwelli ng, ’ and blzarata,‘

a proper nam e,

’77 i s substituted

for t : as, Vasalzi, bharalzo.

1 This word ought not to belong to this SI’

I tra, as i t i s intended onl y forwords with a single 75 but the Sanksh. Szi ra

,in its corresponding rul e, adds

7778774977777 and samp atti besides : [see L assen , A pp.,p .

2 A s this change of p rati to p agh' is universal [see L assen, p . it i s

singular that this is the only instance given by Vararuchi in a Sutra . T he

SE C'

l‘

. or VA R A R L’

C I I I . 1 1 4

GA RBH I'J‘

E NA H . ( 10)o o

I n garblum,pregnant, ’ 72 i s substl tuted for t : as

,Gabb/zm m /t .

A IRI VA T E CHA . ( 1 1 )o p

I n a zra vata , I ndra’s elephant, ’ n i s substi tuted for t : as, E ra -raw .

fl y .

PRA DIPT A K A DA MBA DOHA DE SHU DO L A H . ( 1 2 )I n these words l i s substituted for (Z : as

,

I ’alittam ,kalam vo, dohalo.

1

Pradipta , kindled ’

; kadam ba,‘

the tree so called ’

; dobada, the longingof a pregnant wom an .

’

GADGA DE RA H . ( 1 3 )I n ga dga da ,

‘inarticulate utterance, ’ r is substituted for d as, Gaygaro.

SA NK HYI Y I M CHA . ( 14)I n w ordsg gpressive of num ber, r i s substituted for d as,

E i raha,varaha

,teraha.

E kadasa,‘

eleven ’

, dwadaéa twelve ’

; trayodasa,‘thirteen .

’But the d

m ust be ai single’

letter [by Sutra or the rul e will not appl}; thus wefind Chauddaha for Chaturdaéa,

‘

fourteen, ’ (by iii . 3 , and iii .

PO VA H .

V i s substituted for a single non- initial p : as,

Savo,savaho

,ulavo

,uvasaggo.

7 ; f I 0Sapa, a curse ’

; sapatha, a eurse’

; ulapa, a kind of grass ’; upasarga,a portent .’

o 0 0

F rom the use of p rayas, [i m pl i ed from Sutra 2 ] we.. m fcrthat thi s ruleu applieswhereger there is no el ision .

.IPIDE MA H .

I n the words a’p éq’a, pressing, ’ m i s substituted for p as

,fim elo [of i .

UT T A RiYI NiYA YORJJo VA .

I n the word uttariya, and in Words ending with the affix aniya, j j i ssubstituted for y : as

,

Uttariam or uttariJ'

Jam ,ram aniam or ram anijjam , bharani’am or bharanijJam .

I C 0

Uttariya, an outer garm ent ’; ram am ya, pleasm g’

; bharaniya , to becheri shed.’

Prak . Sanj . reads in the S li t. p rati for p ra tz’

sam . H em a-chandra has a

Sdtra, Pratyddau(la/a.

l I em a-chandra has also (Io/tale .

1 18 THE PR A K R I T A PRA K A SA 1 1 .

CHHI YAYAM HA H .

I n the word ckka’g/d,‘

a shadow,

’It is substituted for y : as, Child/1d .

K A BA NDHE BO MA’

H .

’

I n the word [caband/ea ,

‘

a headless trunk , ’ m i s substituted for b : as

K am andko.

’

TO DA H .

D i s substituted for a non-initial t as,

Nado, vidavo.

Nata, an actor'; Vi tapa, a branch .

’

SA T AiéA K A T A K A I T A BHE SHU DHA H . ( 2 1 )I n the words sa id,

‘

an ascetic’s clotted hair, ’ éalcata,‘

a cart, ’ kaitablza,a dem on, ’ db is substituted for t as, S tudied, saadlw, Iceqllzaao [of Sti tra

SPH A T I K E L A H .

I n sp lzatz'

lca , crystal , ’ l i s substituted for t : as, Pbalz'

lw [ of S li t.

nasmfi gg a .

L i s substituted for a single non-initial d as,

Dalim am , talaam ,valahi

'

.

c t c

Dadim a, a pom egranate ’

,tadaga, a pond ’

; vadabhi , an awni ng, etc.

on a palace.

’ Since p rayas, generally, ’ l s im pl ied from Si’

i tra 2 , we inferthat such form s as the following are also adm i ssible . as

, dddzm am , w dzsam ,

m vzdo.

THO DHA H .

D71 i s substituted for a single non-initial th : as,

Madham , j adharam ,kadhoram .

Matha, 2‘

a college ’

; j athara, the belly ’

; kathora,‘hard.’

A NK O’

I’

HE LLA R .

I n ankotka,‘

a plant, ’ II i s substituted for fit : as, A nkallo.

PHO BH A H .

B 1» i s substituted for a single non-initial p k ; as,

Sibha, sebhalia, sabbari'

,sabhalam .

éipha,‘

a fibrous root ’; sephalika,‘

a flower ;’saphari,

‘

a sm all fish’

;

saphal a,

°

frui tful .’

0 C O 0K abandka also m eans water, ’

and in thi s sense Lap land/1a 1 8 sai d to bea Sanskrit word [sec Wil son

’s L exi con ]Masc . in Sans .

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

1 20 T H E P t .

-\s .

-1 [SECT. 1 1 .

YA SHTYI M L A H . (3 2 )

I n the word yashtz’

,a stick , ’ I is substituted for y/ as E d i t/ti.

K utA'

T E CH A H . (3 3 )

I n kz'

l'dta ,

‘

a barbarian,

’07& i s substituted for the initial 76 : as, e/u'

ztzdo.

K UBJE KHA H . ( 34)I n 7.5u73ja,

‘hum p-backed , ’ 7.:7t i s substituted for the initial letter : E kama.

DOL I DA NDA DA sA NE SHU ( 3 5 )o t.

I n the words dold, a l i tter ’

; dangle, a staff ’

: demand , a tooth, ’ (7 I Ssubstituted for the initial letter : as

,p old

,dttnclo

, dasm zo.

PA RUSH A PA RI GH A PA RI K HI SU PHA H .

I n the words p amwba , harsh ’

; p artyka, a club ’

; p etrifi ed, a m oat, ’ p 71i s substituted for the initial letter : as, P7

t

aruso, p 71alz'

7zo, p halz

’

ltd .

PA NA SE’PI .

A lso in the word p and as , the bread-frui t tree, ’ p 71 is substituted for pas, Pltanaso.

VI SINYA'

M BHA H . (3

I n the word 2 2 3 272 2, an assem blage of lotus-flowers, ’ 671 i s substituted forthe initial letter, as 67153 222 2. F rom the express m ention of the fem inine

we infer that the rule does not hold in the neuter m ’

sam ,

‘

the

lotus-fibre.

’

MA NMA THE VA H . (3 9)I n the word m anm atha,

‘

love,

’a i s substituted for the ini tial letter : as

,

Vam m ako.

L I HA LE NA H . (40)I n the word la’ha la , ‘n i s substituted for the initial letter as Nd/talo.

SHA TsI VA K A SA PT A PA 1015 112111 CHH A H . (41 )

form s in use or there ought to be som e difference of m eaning in the twowords. T he m eaning in the text seem s justified by a. Var. L cct. m adlzuyaskti

in two MSS . but Cf. L ass . I nst . p . 100. L assen (p . 195 ) illustrates lag /ti bythe m odern la t/t,

‘

a colum n ’: as, F iroz e L ath .

Two MSS.

’

read lo7za 7a,

‘

m ade of iron, ’ for the unknown word ldlzalabut as H em a-chandra [see note 4, St

’

tt. recognises the word, as well as

three, if not four of the MSS . of Vararuchi , it is probably correct. H em a

chandra’s rule is also found in the Prak . S anj .

sum . or V A 11 11 11 17011 1 . 1 2 1

I n these words chit is substituted for the initial letter : as,

Chhatthi, chham m uho,chhavao, chhattavanno.

Shashthi, the sixth day of the lunar fortnight ’; shanm ukha,( Kartikeya ’

;I 1 5sayaka

,a young ani m al

’

; saptaparna, a k ind of tree .

’

NO NA H SARVA TRA . (42 )I nitial ’ is no longer im pl ied here . N is substituted for a single n

'

every

where as,

Nat,kanaam ,

vaanam ,m anuso.

Tt z c

h ad t,

a ri ver ’

; kanaka, gold ’

; vachana, speech ; m anusha, hum an .

’

sasnon SA H . (43 )S substituted for 3 and 373 : as,

"

(

i—

133 51 550, nist’

i,ankuso ; ( 373 ) sandho, vasaho, kasaam .

Sabda, a sound n isa,

‘

night ’; ankasa,‘

an elephant’s hook ’

; shandha,

t

a eunuch vri shabha, a bull’

; kashaya, brown .

’

DA éA'

D I SHU H A H . (44)I n the etc .

, 73 is substituted for 3 as,

Daha, earaha, varaba, teraha .

l

Daéa,

‘

ten’

; ekadasa,‘

eleven ’

; dwadasa,‘twelve ’

; trayoda’

sa,

‘thirteen .

’

[ of ii . 14, for the change of cl to tn ]SA NJNI YI M VA. (43 )When the word is a nam e

,the substitution of 73 for 3 in (73132 i s optional : as

,

Dahamuho, dasamuho dahavalo dasavalo ;‘

daharaho, dasaraho.

IDa sam ukha

,a nam e of Ravana dasabala

,a Bauddha teacher ’

; Dasac

ratha,the nam e of a king .

’

DIVA SE SA SYA . (43 )I n the word ( lipase , a day,

’

71 i s substituted 2 for 3 : as, D3a7to.

SNUSHI YA'

M NHA H . (47 )I n the word 3 732337331

,

i

a daughter-in-law ,

’”It is substituted for 371

,as

1 I t m ay be worth while to trace the steps by whi ch trayodaéa becom esteraka . By i . 5 , we have treyodam ; by ii . 2 , iii . 3 , 3300351331 by ii. 14, 44,teom ka ; and

,finally

,as the e and 0m eet in Sandhi , by iv. 1

, the o i s elided .T wo MSS . m ake this rule Optional (by continuing rd from S . and

add (Zia -30,which is the usual form in the plays .

1 2 2 TH E P RAK R I T A PRA K AIS’

A [seer 1 1 1 .

SE CT ION THE THIRD .

UPA RI LOPA H K A GA DA T A DA PA SHA SAM . ( 1 )

The eight consonants 73, y, c], t, d, 3,are el ided when standing

first in a conjunct ; and the _r_em aining letter, if .

it i s not at the beginning ofp ut“? ‘ Q uo a c

the word, is doubled~ 50,5 1 of this Section.

1 Thus,fl a y

[ 7c. ] Bhattam , sitthao.

Bhakta,‘devoted ’

; sikthaka,‘bee’

s-wax’

(nea t )

[g. ] muddho, siniddho.

Mugdha,‘

fool ish ’

; snigdha,‘kind .’

[ d ] K haggo, saJJo.

K hadga, a sword ; shadja, the fourth note of the gam ut .’

[ L ] Uppalam , uppao.

Utpala, a blue lotus ’; utpata, a portent.’

[ cl ] Mugge, muggaro.

Mudga, a kidney-beaii ’

; mudgara, a ham m er.

’

sutto, pajjatto.

Supts , asleep ’

; paryapta, adequate.

’

[ 37a ] gotthi, nitthuro,Goshthi, an assem bly ’

; nishthura, harsh .

’

K haliam,neho.

Skhalita, stum bling ’

; sneha,‘

love.

’

A DHO MA NA YAM . ( 2 )The consonants m , n, and y are elided when standing last in a conjunct,

Sutras 50, 5 1 are constantly required in carrying out the followingSt

’

i tras. Vararuchi’

s plan with regard to conjuncts is, first to enjoin the

el ision of certain letters (Sutras 1 then in other cases (Sutras 9to enj oin the substituti on of a single letter for the conjunct ; but whether thechange be thus an el ision or a substitution

,in either case, bySutras 50and 5 1

this letter is doubled, unless i t be r or 73 (Sti tra or at the beginning of a word .

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

1 24 TH E PRA K R I T A PRA K A SA [3 13013 1 1 1 .

Puvvanho, avaranho ; kalht'

tram , albédo ; vam hano.

Purvahna,‘

fore-noon ’

; aparfihna, afternoon ’

; hablara,‘

the white waterlil y ’

; ablada, j oy ’

; brahm ana, a brahm an .

’

YUK T A SYA .

This is an ( td/tz'

lcdra [ of i . 1 ] and i s im plied in the succeeding Sutras tothe end of the Section . Our rules are henceforth to be understood as

supplying a substitute for a conjunct . A tflzi for ( 13 15777 (by Sutra 1 1 ) willserve as an instance . The use of the word ‘conjunct ’ shews that thesesubstitutions are not intended to apply to final letters, sm ce the secondm em ber of a final conj unct is rejected by

-

Pan . V1 1 1 . 2 , 2 3 .

SHT A SYA THA H .

T 71. is substituted for the conjunct 37zt as,

L atthi, di tthi'

.

Yashti, a stick ’

; drishti,‘sight.’

A STHINI .

I n the word a3 t7ti, a bone, ’ fit is substituted for the conjunct” : as, A l ibi.

STA SYA THA H .

T it i s substituted for at. This Sutra revokes Sutra 1,which would enj oin

the el ision of the 3,as being the first m em ber of the conjunct at.

H attho, sam attho, thui, thavao, kotthuho.

H asta,‘

the hand ’

; sam asta,‘

al l’

; stuti,‘prai se ’

; stavaka, a nosegay ’

;

kaustubha,

‘Krishna’s jewel .’

NA STA MER.

I n the word stam ba, a shrub, ’ fit i s not substituted for at : as, Tam bo [32athe 3 i s el ided by iii . l ] .

ST A MBHE KHAH .

I n the word stam bha, a post, ’ 701 i s substituted for st : as,E kam bfio.

STHANA’

VA HA RE .

I n the word s ibdan,

‘

firm,

’7671 i s substituted for the conjunct

, exceptwhen it signifies Siva : as

, E 7zdm't . Why do we m ake this exception ?

When i t signifies Siva, i t is t7zdm t (by S .

SPHOT A K E .

I n the word 3p 7zota7'

a,

‘

a boil , ’ Hz i s substituted for the conjunc t : as,

sncr . or van -1 RUCH I . 1 2 5

nvxéavflsm nm vusnuJA H . ( 1 7 )

J is substituted for the conjunct Ty, and al so for the conjunct in the

two words Sq‘t/d and ab7nfm ang/u as,

M

K ajj am ,sejja, ahim ajj i

'

l .

I I o oKarya,to be done ’

; sayya , a bed’

; abh1m anyu, A rJuna’

s son .

’

T IIRYA DH A IRYA SA UNDA RYA:SCHA RYA PA RYA NTE SHU RA H .

I n these words 7: is substituted for the fonjunct ry, (and as by S . 54,r

and 71 are never doubled, S . 50i s here inoperative .)

Turam,dhi

'

ram [cf. i . sunderam,aehchheram , perantam .

0 0 oTurya , a m usreal i nstrum ent ’° dhai rya, firm ness ’; saundary a, beauty ’

;

a scharya ,‘wonderful ’

; paryanta, lim it .’

sears vi .

I n the word stint/a , the sun,

’

7: i s optionally substituted for W as

,Sam

,

00

or el se by S . 1 7 , mayo.

CH A URYA SA ME SHU RI A M .

I n words l ike c7taurya , M am i s substituted for ry as,

Choriam ,seri am V i ri am .

Chaurya , theft fs aurya,‘heroism ’

; virya ,‘heroism .

’

F rom the use of the phrase ‘

like ’in the Sutra

,this is a class

,which can

onl y be determ ined by authority [ of i .

PA RYA ST A PA RYA’

NA SA UK UMARYE SHU LA H .

I n the words p a ryasta,‘

fallen’

; p aryana, a saddle ’

; saf

ztkutndrg/a,i

youth

fulness,

’7 is substituted for ry : as, Palla tfiaam , p alldnam , soam a llam .

’

RT A SYA T A H .

T i s substituted for rt : as,

Kevat tao, nattao,natt ai.K aivartaka, a fisherm an

’

; nartaka , an actor ’

; martaki, an actress .’

F A TTA NE .

T i s also substituted for the conjunct in p a ttana , a town as Pa ttanam .

We m ay here retrace the steps by which saukum dryam becom es soa

m allam . By i . 2 2 , 41 , i t becom es seumanj am (the 7c being elided by ii .the present Sutra , w ith iii . 50, gives 77 for ry, and the d i s shortened beforethe conjunct by i . 10[see note, p .

1 2 6 TH E PRA'

K R i T A PRA K A'

sA [3 nor . 1 1 1 .

NA DHuRTAm a .

_T is not substituted for at in the class dbarta, etc. Thus we haveDhutte, kitti, vattam anam , vatta, avatto, sam vattao, nivattao

,vatti s

,

atto, kattari'

,m uttt

'

, (r being el ided in these words by iii.Dhurta, a gam ester ’

; kirti,‘

fam e vartam a’

tna, existing ’

; vz'

trta,

tidings ’; avarta, a whirlpool ’

; sam vartaka, Baladeva’

; nivartaka,‘

re

turning ’

; vartika, a i r/fie arta, a kni fe ’

; murti,‘

form .

’

GA RTE D

’

A H .

I n the word garta, a hole, ’ d is substituted for rt : as, Gaddo.

GA RDAB HA SA MMA RDA VI TA RDI VI CHHA RDI SHU RDA SYA

I n the words gwrdabba,‘sm ell

’

; sam m a/rda ,‘tram pl ing ’

; vita/rd»,‘

a

covered terrace ’

; vicbbwrdz'

, a fine building ’d is substituted as,

Gaddabo, summ actgto, viadgli, m’

cbbaddi .

T YA T HYA DYAM CHA CHHA JA'

H .

Cb, ebb, j , are respectively substituted for ty, thy , (by ;W arn, pachchakkham.

m

Nitya, constant ’; pratyaksha,‘perceptible.

’

[ tby .] Rachchha, m ichchha, pachchham .

Rathya, a road ’

; m ithya, fal sely ’

; pathya,‘proper.’

[ dy .] Vijjé, vejjam .

Vidyz’

t,knowledge ’

; vaidya, m edical.’

DHYA HYOR JHA B .

Jb is substituted for dbg/ and byJ

[ dby] Majjham ,ajjhao.

Madhya,‘

m iddle ’

; adhyaya,‘

a chapter.

’

[ by] Vajjhao,i

gujjhao.

Véhyaka , external ’

; guhyaka,‘secret .’

SH K A SK A K SHAM KHA H .

substituted for 3b7c, sle, and 7c3b : as,

[ sb7a.] Mukkham , pokkharo.

Mushka, a heap , ’ pushkara,‘

a lake .

’

[ 37a ] Khando, khandho.

Skanda, Skanda ’

; skandha, the shoulder.

’

[ b3b.] Khado, jakkho.

Kshata, wounded ’

; yaksha, a dem igod.’

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

1 2 8 T H E PR A'

K n i'

it-xr nA K .{s'

A [se er 1 1 1,

[ 37a ] Panli o, sinhof

Praéna, a questi on ; Si sua, peni s .’

CH IHNE NDHA H .

I n the word obi/ma,‘

a m ark, ’ nclb is substituted for the conjunct : as,

SHPA SYA PH A H .

Pb is substituted for 3bp as,

Puppham ,sappham , nipphao.

t

Pushpa , a flower ’

; sashpa, young grass ’; n i shpaya, Wi thout water.

’

SPA SYA SA RVA TRA STH I T A SYA .

Pb is substituted for wherever it is found ( that i s, in the beginningor end of a word) : as

,

1 3 40"7

Phanso [of iv. phandanam .

Sparsa, touch ’

; spandana, a thlobbing.

SI CH A .

S i is also som e tim es substituted for 319 as, Padz°

3 t°

cld7ti for p ratr’

sp arddbz'

n,

‘

urival ’

[of. i .

vAsnPE A éRUNI H AH .

E is substituted for 3bp in the word edsbp a, when it signifies,‘

a tear ’

as d o. Why do we specify this signification ? When i t signifies,‘hot

vapour, ’ we m ust use eappbo (in accordance with S .

K ARSHAPA NE ( 3 9 )I n the word bdrsbdparm, a certain weight, ’ b is substituted for the con

junct as,d dvagw.

s'

eHA T SA PsAM CHHA H .

Obb is substituted for the conjuncts écb, t3 , and p 3 thus,[ 3375] Pachchhim am , achchheram ; [ ta ] vachchho, vachchharo ; 193

lichchha, Juguchchha.

Paéchim a, western ’

; ascharya, wonderful ’

; vatsa,‘

a calf’

; vatsara,‘

a

year ’

; l ipsa,‘desire ’

; jugupsa,‘censure .

’

vnI s'

CH I K E NCHHA H

I n the word erz'

3cbiba, a scorpion, ’ a cbb i s substituted for tab : as,

Vincbbuo (of. i .

NOT SUK OT SA VA YOH

I n the words utsuba,‘

regretting , ’ and utsava, a feast,

’the substitution

sr er . 1 1 1 ] or VA R A RUCH I . 1 2 9

of ebb for t3 (enj oined by S . 40) is forbidden : we have therefore Ussuo and

ussavo (by iii . 1 ,NHO HA H . (43 )M is substituted for 72m ,

although ( by S . 2 ) m is properly el ided wheni t is the second memberbf

“

a conJunct : as ,

Jam m o,vam m aho.

Janm an,

‘birth ’

; m anm atha,‘

love .

’

[of ii .

MNA JNAPA NCE i sA TPAN CHA DA sE a NA H . (44)N is substituted for m s and j n, and for the conj unct in the words p an

cbdéat and p ancbadaéa : as,

Pajjunno, janno , vinnanam , pannasa, pannaraho.

Pradyum na,

‘Kam a’

; yaJna,‘

a sacrifice ’

; vijnana,‘knowledge ’

; pan

chasat,‘

fifty ’

; panchadasa,‘

fifteenth .

’

T A'

L A vs INT E NTA B . (45 )I n the word tdlewrz

'

nta ,’

a fan,

’a t is substi tuted for the conjunct : as,

Tdb wentaam .

BH INDI PALE NDA H . (45 )I n the word bbz’ndsdla,

{

a dart, ’ net i s substituted for the conj unct : as,

Bbz'

ndz'

vdlo.

VIHWA LE BHA HA U VA . (47 )I n the word e z

'

bwa la,‘

agitated, ’ 6b and b are optionally substituted forthe conjunct : as

,Vebbbalo

, m’

balo [for the e of the first form see i .ATMA N I PA H . (48 )I n the word atm an, self, ’ p is substituted for the conjunct as

,A pp d .

K MA SYA .

P is substituted for the conj unct bm : as,

Ruppam ,ruppini .

Rukm a,

‘

gold ’

; Rukm in i'

,

‘

L akshrni .

T he Com m entator rem arks that this and the preceding Sutra (whichm ight otherwise have been united ) are separated , because the latter of the

two ( S . 49 ) i s absolute, while the form er ( S .48 ) is only partially applicable,as dtm an adm its of another form [ see v . 45 ] besides app d .

s'

s sn innsA Yon DwrrWA n A NADA U . ( 50)Wherever after perform ing an elision or substitution enj oined by a rule

,

a single consonant com es to represent a conjunct,this letter i s always

doubled , except in the beginning of a word .

1 30 THE PR A

'

K R I T A PR A K A'

S

'

A [snort 1 1 1 .

A s exam ples of such, after elisionBhuttam ,

m aggo.

Bhulrta, eaten ’

[ the 70elided by iii. m arga,‘

a path ’

[ the r elidedby iii.

A s exam ples of such, after substitutionL atthr

’

,ditthi, hattho.

Yashti ,‘

3 stick ’

; drishti, sight ’ [ iii. hasta,‘

the hand ’

[iii .Why do we except those which are at the beginning of a word ? Com

3

pare such cases as,K haliam

,kham bho, thavao.

Skhalita,‘

fallen’

[ the 3 elided by iii . stam bha,

‘

a post ’ [ iii . 14]stavaka,

‘

a nosegay ’

[ iii.

VA RGE SHU YUJA H puRVA n ( 5 1 .

When the doubling cuJoined by the previous Sutra takes place, whether ln

regard to the fir st or the second m em ber of the conjunct, wherever the singlerepresentative 1 s an aspirate (that i s, the second or fourth letter of itsit i s to be doubled by prefixing its ewn non-aspirate in the case of the otherletters, of course they them selves are their own duplicates .

E xam ples by el ision :

Vakkhanam , aggho, muchchha, nijjharo, la ddho, nibbharo.

Vyakhyana, explanation ’

; argha, oblation ’

; murchha,‘

fainting ’

; nir

jhara,‘

a cas cade ’

; lubdha, greedy ’

; nirbhara,‘

excessive.

’

E xam ples by substitutionDitthi

’

,latthi, vachchho, vipphariso, nittharo, j akkho, lachchhf, atthi

’

,

puppham .

Drishti,‘sight ’; yashti, a stick vakshas

,

‘

the breast ’ [cf iv.

visparsa, touch ’

; nistara, crossing yaksha , a dem igod ’

; lakshm i'

,

beauty ’

; asthi , a bone ’

; pushpa,‘

a flower.

’

(5 2 )

I n the words nida , etc., the m edial letter is doubled, although it is not aconj unct : as

,

Neddam [for the 6 see i . settam , pem m am, vahittam , UJJuo, jannao,

jovvanam .

1 g

cT he Prakri ta Sarvaswa explains yuj , Yug 1 t1 sam anam dwrtiyaehatur

thadinam sanjnt'

t .’

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

1 3 2 THE PRAK R I T A PR A K A'

SA [sncr 1 1 1 .

praise of the gods ’; alanastam bha, an elephant’s post ’ [for this, cf. iii . 14,and iv.SEVA

'

DI SHU CHA . (5 3 )In thewords seed, etc., the doubling of the m edi al letter is also optional as,

Sevva, seva ; ekkam , earn ; nakkho, naho ; devvam ,da

’

r’

vam ; asivvam ,

asivam ; tellokkam , teloam ; nihitto, nihio ; tunhikko, tunhio ; kannir'

tro,

kaniaro diggham ,diham ; ratti, rai ; dukkhio, duhio ; asso, aso 1

; issare, isare ;vissaso, visaso ; ni ssaso, p isase rassi, rasi ; m itto, m io ; pusso, puso .Seva,

‘service ’

; eka,‘

one nakha,‘

a nail ’

; daiva,‘

fate ’

; aSiva,‘

un

lucky ’

; trailokya,‘

the three worlds ’; nihita,‘

entrusted ’

; tushnika,‘silent ’;

karnikara,‘

the tree so called ’

; d i’

rgha,‘

long ’

; tutt i,‘

the night ’; duhkhita,‘

wretched ’

; aéwa ,‘

a horse ’

; iswara,‘

God’

; viéwasa, confidence ’

; niswasa,‘

a sigh ’

; raém i,‘

a ray’

; m itra,‘friendly ’

; pushya,‘

the eighth lunarasterism .

’

T he alternative can be considered in two ways ; in words like seed,

there would have been no occasion for the doubling, except for this rule ;in words like dirgba, the doubling is already enj oined by other rules [e.g . iii .3 , and iii. and therefore the Option granted by this is required todispense with their operation .

2

VIPRA K A RSHA H .

This being an adbz'

bdra will be im pl ied in the following S1'

1 tras. Yuk

tasg/a still continues to be im pl ied from S . 9 . We are therefore to understand that the subject of the succeeding Sti tras to the end of the sectionwil l be the separation [eip rabarsba] of conjuncts.

f l ,

K L I SHT A SL I SHT A RA TNA K RIYA SA RNGE SHU T A T SWA RA VA T

PriRVA SYA . ( 50)I n the words bla’sbta, etc .

, the conjunct consonants are divided ; and thefirst consonant, which has no vowel of its own, suffers vocalisation, and

becom es sounded with the original vowel :3 as,

1 I should prefer dso [cf. i . though the MSS . and the Pr . Sanj . have aso.

2 F or this rule, of. L ass ,pp . 2 75— 7 , who would explain som e of the

instances by the force of the accent.3 A t the sam e tim e the new syllable so created is, of course, subject to

previou s rules,and thu s the first consonant i s som etim es elided by ii . 2 .

Thus we have R ama , ratana , and then (by ii . 2 ) raana ; and in S . 6 5 , p adm a ,

p a ti ents , and finally p a it'

m a .

0SE C

'

l‘

. 1 1 1 ] or VA R A RUCH I . 1 3 a

K ili tfham , silittham ,raanam

,kirit’i

,sarango (or in its crude form

K lishta,

"d istressed ’

; slishta ,‘

em braced ’

; ratna,‘

a gem’

; kriya,‘

an

action ’

; sarnga,‘horny .

’

K R I SHNE vA . (6 1 )I n the word brz’3bnd , the separation of the conj unct 37172 is optional : in

the case of separation, the vowel m ust be suppl ied as before ; here, however, the option i s definitely restricted ; for the separation is im perative,when bre’sbna m eans ‘

black,’as ba sm zo ; but is forbidden when i t m eans

Vishnu , ” as bdnbo [iii .

I E s’

a iHRiK RirA K LANrA K LEsA MLANA SWA PNA SPA RsA HA R

SHARH A GA RHE SHU . (6 2 )I n the following words the conjunct is divided, and the first consonant

suffers vocalisation as before ; but the inserted vowel is i , and not the originalvowel .Siri, hiri, kirito , kilanto, kileso, m ilanam , sivino, phariso, barise, aribo ,

gariho .

Sri,

‘beauty ’

; hri,‘sham e

’

; krita,‘bought ’; klanta,

‘wearied ’

; kleéa,

distress ’; m lana, withered ’

; swapna, sleep ’

; sparéa, touch ’

; harsha,‘j oy ’

;

arha,‘worthy ’

; garha ,‘

a censurer.

’

A H K SHMA'

sLAGH A YOH . ( 6 3 )I n the words Itsbm d ,

‘

the earth , ’ and tldgbd,‘praise, ’ the conjunct is

divided as before, but the first consonant is sounded wi th a : as, K bam d,

saldbd.

SNE E B VA . (64)I n the word sneba,

‘

love,

’the division of the conjunct is optional

,but

when i t does take place, the first consonant is sounded with a, as in the

preceding Sutra : as, Sa aebo, rte/10. [F or the second form ,of. iii . i .]

UH PA DM A T A NviSA ME SHU. (6 5 )I n p adm a , a lotus , ’ and words like tenet (fem . of term ,

such aslagbvi (fem . of Zagbu,

‘

light ’) etc., the conjunct is divided, and the firstconsonant is sounded with u instead of the original vowel : as, Paam am ,

tanui,labui .

JYAYAM 1T .

I n j yd,‘

a bowstring, ’ the conjunct is divided , and the first consonant i ssounded with 5, instead of the origi nal vowel : as, J éd .

1 34 THE PRA K R I T A PR A K AQA [SE eT . I V .

SE CT ION THE FOURTH .

SA NDHAV A CHAM A JLOPA VI S’

E SHA BA HUL A M . ( 1

A eb is here of course the p ratydbdra , or technical term for all the

vowel s . When vowel s are in Sandhi , or in a state of im m ediate conjunction,

various kinds of vowel s and el isions arise .

1 . Various kinds of vowels : as,

Jaunaadam , j aiinaadam ; na’

r‘

ssotto, nafsotto vahumuham , vahi'rmuham ;

kannaiiram , kannar'

rram ; siroveana, siraveana; piapiam , piapiam ; sx’

z’

rsiam ,

srasram ; savomuo savomuo ; saroruham , sararuham .

Yamunatata, the bank of the Jum na’

; nadisrotas,‘

the river-stream ’

;

vadht’

imukha, having a wom an’s face ’

; karnapi’

rra, the m im osa éirr’sha ’

;

sirovedana,‘

a pain in the head ’

; pitapita, drunk and not drunk ’

; sitasita,

white and black ’

; saroruha, a lotus .’

2 . Various kinds of elision : as,

Raaiilam , raulam ; tuhaddham , tuhaaddham ; m ahaddham ,m ahaaddham

pavadanam , paavadanam [viii . 5 1] kum bharo , kum bhaaro pavanuddhaam ,

pavanoddhaam .

Rajakul a,‘

a royal fam ily ’

; tavérddha,‘half of thee ’

; m am arddha,‘half of m e

’

; padapatana,‘prostration at any one

’s feet ’; kum bhakara,‘

a

potter ’

; pavanoddhata, tossed by the wind .’“9 2 3 1

999111 9 91 gonsonant follqwsk it i s always the first of the twom eeting vowels, which is el ided (when there i s any el ision at all

,which is

not always required) . F rom the use of babula,or

‘variously,

’in the

Sutra, we conclude that these changes are in som e cases absolute, in othersthey adm it of different form s ; hence, when other form s are m et w ith , theyare still to be considered as here provided for in the labsbcma or Sutra .

T he Com m . of this St’1 tra i s obscure, and i ts exam ples corrupt, and theMSS . afford little aid ; but the Fraik . Sanj iv. by its use of the St’ttra in its

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

1 36 THE PRA'

K R I T A P RA K A'

s

'

A [SECT. l v.

STRI YAM AT . ( 7 )A i s substituted for the final consonant of a fem inine word as

7

Saria, padivaa, was.

Sarit a river ’

; pratipad,‘

the first day of a lunar fortnight ’; vach ,speech .

no E A . ( 3 )Rd is substituted a fem inine word as

,

Dhura, gira.Dhur,

‘

the carriage-pole ’

; gir,‘speech .

’

NA VI DYUT I .

14is not substituted for the final letter of etch/a t, lightning ’

(by S .

but although a fem inine noun ending in a consonant,it follows St’i tra 6 , and

becom es Vg'

jj t't .

sA E A Do DA H . ( 10)Da is substituted for the final cl of tarad

,

‘

autum n, ’ and thus we find

Sarado [for its gender, of. S .

DI K PRAVRI SHOS SA H .

Sim ilarly 3a i s substituted for the final sibilant of dr3 , a region, ’ and p rd0 0 0 I 0

erzsb, the rainy season ’as, Dzsa , p duso (for the change 1 11 gender, of.

S . 1 8 dit: continues fem inine as before

if we correct it to 3aredm rz’ta, but the two Prak . form s still need som e

correction . I n lines 9 , 10, if we m ake the corrections p d p daeadanam , and

add the form p avanoda’baam in l . 10, we m ay adopt the reading of E BBW

as given in the text, and their Sans . explanations as given in the var. lect.T he lines 1— 3 on p . 3 1 are not wi thout difficulty . L assen has given 1. 1

as a new Sti tra, but I prefer taking it as an additional observation of the

Com m ent. to explain such a form as p avanuddbaam . Pavanoda’baam woul d

have been equally correct, but not p aranaddbaam ; as the elision before a

conj unct (where it takes place at all ) , m ust be that of the form er vowel .Sim ilarly in the Bha1 ti-Kavya, vol . ii . p . 1 14, on the word raeottanga, theSchol . rem arks that although by the rule ‘

lop o’cbab,

’ which enj oin s theeli sion of the preceding vowel, when a second foll ows, i t should be rava ttanga, still by the influence of the babula, the elision is not absolute [A trayadyap z

'

p rdbrz'

te‘

lop o’cba

’z'

tyanena d ebt'

p ara a cbo lop e raeuttungetz'

aydt,

tatbdp z'

babulddbz'

bdrdn ndstz’

lop ab] .

I d tantum vult regula, non dicendum esse az'bd et p rdtr z'

td .

’ Lass . I nst.

s eer . 1 v .] o r vA tt A ur em . 13 7

£0VI NDUA LL

A nuswara is sub stituted for a final m : as,A cbcbbam , racbcbbam , bbaddam ,

aggz'

m , etc.

1

1 111301114. ( 1 3 )

other words,Sandhi in this case i s allowed as, Pba lam arabara z or p balam

a rabara z,he gathers frui t .’

NA NOR HA L I .

A nuswara rs subst1tuted for the dental and palatal nasals when a con

sonant foll ows,and so also is m ’

(as we infer from the preceding Sut.) as,

A nso or am so , kanso or kam so, vanchaniam or vam chanr’

am , vinjho or

vim jho.

c cA nsa, a part ’; kansa, the nam e of a king ’

; vanchanrya , to be tri cked ’

;

Vindhya, the Vindhya m ountains ’ vinjha Vindhya,by iii .

VA K RA'

D I SHU .

I n aabra, etc. A nuswéra is inserted as an augm ent : as,

Vankam, tansam ,

hanso, ans1’

1,

3m ansr

’

r, gun thi, m antham ,

m anansini,

dansanam, phanso, vanno, padinsudam , anso , ahim unko.

c cVakra , crooked ’

; tryasra, a tri angle ’

; hraswa, short ’; asra,

a tear ’

;o s o 1

sm aéru, a beard ’

; gri shti , a cow W i th one calf’

; m asta, the heaa’

; m anasl c c c

wrni, a wrse wom an darsana, Sight sparsa , touch varna, a colour0/ I o

prati sruta, prom i sed ’

; aswa, a horse ’

; abhl mukta , released, ’ etc.

MA’

NSADI SHU VA'

. ( 1 6 )I n such words as m dasa, etc.

, the use of A nuswara is optional as,

1 A s this and the two following rules m erely refer to Prakrit orthography,they are of no im portance in an E nglish translation, and can hardly beunderstood , except by those who understand the original text .

2 There can be l ittle doubt that this addition of Bham aha’

s i s wrong ;the Prak . Sanj . ( though corrupt) is silent about it ; H em a-chandra’s corresponding S t

’

i t . [i . i s ‘

A ’ananano eyanj ane. Na na m a ma t

'

tyete3bdm

3 tbdne, ryanj ane p are, am assedro I n the ex . ansa and Lam a

,Bha

m aha appears to consider the nasal as a dental, in consequence of the dentalsibilant which follows it .

3 F or this m asculine form of afsra , cf. “fill iam s’ Sak . p . 1 6 5,where

Bochtlingk’

s correction [Sak p . 2 1 7] is adopted .

1 38 THE 1'11A1r11 1T A r a A K A sA [sE eT . I V .

Mansani , m asam ; kaham , kaha ; 11 1'

1nam , n1'

1na ; tahim ,tahi (vi .

I I Iasum

, asu.

o o 0Mari sa, fiesh’

; katham ,how utinam

,certainly ’

; tasm in, m that ’;C o

asu, fem . loc. plural of 2 2 am

,thi s .

There i s no definite class of words, such as 222 d22 3a, etc. ; but wherever,

through fear of violating the m etre, A nuswara is som etim es used and som e

tim es om itted,the Com m entator wishes such a word to be considered as

included in the class referred to .

YA YI T A DVA RGANT A H . ( 1 7

When any consonant im m ediately follows, except b and the sibilants 3 .

the p ratydbdra yer/y) , Anuswara m ay optionally becom e the nasal of the classto which the letter belongs as

,Sabbd, 3 22 2273720, a 227co, abgam ,

sanabara‘

z‘

,sa2z

dbo, etc. ; or we m ay use the option of the rule, and say p aabam , rib ald ,

3a22 7cd, etc.‘

Why do we use thep ra tydbdra may in the Sutra’? That we m ay

exclude b and the sibilants, as in ( 1 22 30, etc.,where we can only use A nuswara .

NA SANT A PRAVRI T'

SA RA DA H PUNSI . ( 1 3 )Nouns ending in 22 and 3 , and the two words p rder2 3b and sarad, are to

be used in the m ascul ine gender (the final 22 and 3 being elided by Sat. as,

Kam m o, j am m o, vam m o.

Karm an,

a deed ’

; janm an, birth ’

; yarm an, arm our.

’

Jase, tam o, saro.Yasas, glory ’

; tam as, darkness ’; saras, a lake.

’

Pauso, sarado .Pravrish, the rainy season [cf. iv. sarad, the autum n ’

[cf. i v.

NA sI RONA BHA si . ( 1 9)2322 623 ,

‘

the head, ’ and nabbas, the sky ’

(al though both end in m ustnot be used in the m ascul ine (but in the neuter

,as in Sanskrit) , and thus

we have 8 22 22 222 and naba/m .

PRI SHTHAK SHIPE A éNAH STRIYAM VA . ( 20)T he three words p r2

'

3btba,‘

the back ’

; alt-372 2,

‘

the eye’

; and p raéna, a

A sum d3 22 are conjectural . This Sutra i s considered also to app ly to thecall-x N ,“

anuswaga "which 15_ optionally“added to the term inations of the instr. and—a

loc. pluralh and neuter 110m .

” plur. etc. ; as, t acbcbbebim or -b2, 2 a cbcbbesav C I

or -3 2m 2, 2 a22 a

'

2 or -d2m .

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

140 THE P itA'

K n i T A P RA K A'

S'

A [S E C'L

‘having a garland ’

; dhanavat, wealthy ’

; sabdavat,‘sounding ’

; yauva

navat, youthful ’

; roshavat, angry ’

; pranavat,‘

alive .

’

These various substitutes for m atzq) m ust not be used indscrim inately ,but

’

wi th-

a due regard to the form s observed in classical authors .

[Som etim es we find d instead of watap , and som etim es m anta : as ba

22 22 22 2d or barzum anta fer 72a2 2 a22 2at, the m onkey-chief ’

; others use the substitutes 2 lla and ulla 1n the sense of the affixes technically called 3a 2’3b2’7cd/2

(of: Pan . iv. 2 , as p 22 r2'

lla for p a zuastya (a derivative wi th the afiix

tyalc, Pan. iv. 2,

produced i n the east ’; appulla for dtm zya (a derivativewith the affix cbba, Pan . iv belonging to one’s self.’

we shoulduse keddaba , etc. as,

K eddaha, kettia ; jeddaha, j ettia ; teddaha, tettia ; eddaha, ettia .

Kiyat,

‘how m uch ’

; yavat (explained by Panini as‘

yat parim anam

asya as much as ’

; taya t, so m uch ’

; etavat, thus m uch .

’

Others add ba ttam as substitute for the affix brz’twrw,

but the present Com m entator wishes this to be considered as a provincial ismas, 3 aaba ttam for 3ata7cr2 twas, a hundred tim es ’, 3aba3 3abattam for sabasra

brz’

twas, a thousand tim es .’

The affix ba i s al so frequently added to a word without changing itsm eaning (the 72 beingof course el ided by ii . as

,B bam aro or bbam arao,

H _ 0for bbram ara, a

VIDYUTPiTABHYAM L A H .

T he affix la i s used at the end of the words etclya t,‘

lightning, ’and

p ita ,‘yellow, ’ without al tering their m eaning : as, W172}. or 2 2172 272 ; p iam or

p talam .

[VRINDE VO RA H ]

I n the word artm la, a heap

,

’

r is optionally used after the withoutal tering its m eaning : as, Vranclam or vandam .

K A RENVAM RA NOH STHI T I PA RIVRI T T IH .

I n the word bareaa , a fem ale elephant, ’ the r and 22 are transposed : as,

1 F or this passage, see A pp . B .

See A pp . B . I have added the ex. (om itted in Vararuchi ) from the

Prak . Sanj . T he word j dtau appears to be corrupt ; of. the correspondingrules in Hem a-eh . and the Prak . Sanj .

sum .o r a t om . 141

117 2 2 2 2 2 22 . F rom the express m ention of the fem inine, we infer that the rule

does not hold in the m asculine as, 72 22 2 2 2 2 22 , a m ale elephant .’

ALAN}: LA NOH .

I n the word 6722 2 2 22 , an elephant’s post, ’ the 7 and 22 are transposed (ofcourse, as before , without their vowels) : as 1 12 2 22722 7272 22 22 260for a

’

7d2 2 22 8 722 22 2672 22

[of iii .VRIHA SPA T A U VA HOR BHA A U .

I n the word 2 2 272 22 812 2 72, the regent of the planet Jupiter, ’ 672 and 22 are

respectively substituted for 2) and 72 as, 3 72 22 224212 72 22 2 [of iii .MA L INE L INOR I L A U WI.

I n the word 2 2 2 22 722 2 22 ,‘dirty, ’ 2 and l are optionally substituted for

72'

and 22 respectively as , 2 2 2 22 2722 22 2 or 22 2 22 72 2 2 2 22 2 .

GRIHE GHARO T A TA U .

G72 22 2 22 i s used in the sense of g2'272 22

, a house , ’ except when it is foll owedby 22 22 72,

‘

a m aster ’

: as 972 22 2 2 2 22 2 ,‘

a house .

’‘

Why do we m ake this exC

ceptlon’? Because we have gakava i for 9 2 2 72 2212 22 72 , a householder.

’

13 111311 2 111e 0BA HUL A M .

T he class of words called 27222772 22, etc., are irregularly used instead of the

class 272 2 2 2 872 2 27 2 , etc . as,

I 0 oB adha

,danshtra

’

r,

a tooth ’

; enhim,

1dz’

1n1m , now’

; dh i'al or dh i’rda,

duhita,‘

a daughter ’

; chatuli am ,chaturya,

‘dexterity ’

; m anduro,m anduka,

a frog ’

; ghare nihitam [iv . gribe nihi tam ,

‘deposited in the house ’

;

kandotto,2 utpala

,

‘

a blue lotus ’

; gola, godavari,‘

the river Godavari ’;nidalam ,

3 lalata,(

the forehead ’

; bhum aa, bh l

'

i,

‘

the earth" veluriam ,

vaidi'

i rya, lapis laz ul i ’; avahovasam ,ubhayaparéwa,

‘both sides m aindo orm aando,4chuta, a m ango tree.

’

The word 22272 in the Sfitra is used in the sense of‘sim ilitude ’

or

‘class ’

; therefore all words of com m on speech m ay be considered as com

prehended under this rule, which are used by convention in differentprovinces .5

D72 22722 i s a Sans . word, see L ex . ; cf. also H indfist. La .)

3 Cf. Sans . 72 22 2 2 2702 22 .3 Cf. Sans .4Cf. Sans . 2 2 222-2 2 22 2 .

5 A s m ight be expected, the MSS . differ very m uch in severalPrakri t ex . of this Sutra : of. var. lect .

142 TH E PRA K R I T A PRA K z

’

xéA [sncr v .

SE CT ION THE F I FTH .

ON DE CLENSI ON.

A T A OT SOH . ( 1 )0i s substituted for 8 2 2 , the afiix of the nom . sing , after a word ending in

a : as,

Vachehho, vasaho, puriso.

Vrikshas,‘

a tree ’

; vrishabhas,‘

a bull ’

; purushas,‘

a m an.

’

[The a i sconsidered to be eli ded by iv.

JA s'

SA SOR LOPA H .

J 2 8 and 522 8 , the affix es of the nom . and ace. p lural are elided after wordsending in 22 as 22a c7207272 2i 8072 2 22 22 for 2 22 72 872 2272 30672 22 22 252 , The trees are beautiful .’

H ere the vowel 22 is lengthened by Si’

i tra 1 1 , and then the affix j ag i s elided .77 22 2 7207272 2 22 22 2 7207272 2272 22 for 22 22 72 372 2122 Bring the trees .’ H ere

the final 22 becom es 2 by Sli t. 1 2 , and then the affix 322 8 is elided .

A TO’MA H .

3

The 22 of 22 222,the affix of the accusative singul ar, is el ided after words

ending in 22 : as, 7 207207272 2 2 2 p 22727272a

‘

2‘

, for 2 2 272 872 22 222 p rekskate, H e sees a tree.

’

F or the anuswara, see iv. 1 2 .

T im on NA H .

A fter words ending in 22,2 2 22 is substituted for té and dm , the affixes of

the instrum ental singular, and the genitive plural : as,77 2207207272 2 22 22

, 22 22 2 72

chkdgm ,

’ for 2 22 72 872 2 2222 , by a tree, ’2 2

°

2'

72 872d22 2i222 ,‘

of trees.’ T he e of the

form er word is caused by Sat. 1 2 ; the long vowel of the latter by S i’i t.

So the Prak . Sanj . of. the addition in D noticed in the Var. L ect.2 Such is the interpr. of the MSS . ; but of. viii . 69

,2'

22f2 22 .3 The sign 3 i s accidentally om itted in the Sutra as printed in the text .4The MSS . write 22 2207207272 22 22 22 , w oke/272 2222 22 222 indifferently, the final anus

wara in these and sim ilar form s being considered optional by iv. 1 6 .

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

144 TH E PR A'

K R I T A PnuK A'

s-K [sme lt v .

7700720727208072 22 2 2 70, ‘

the trees are beautiful ’

[for the elision of j 2 2 8 , see S li t .2 ] ;

1 0007207272000, 0007207272000, 0007207200727 for02 272 872 277 [see 0007207272000for0027872022020[sec sli t.

E CHA SUPYANINA SOH .

E is substituted for this final 0, before all the case -affixes except those of

the loo. and gen . sing. ( 22 2°

and and from the0720in the rule we con

clude that the long vowel also m ay be used ; as 000720727201007272720720, beholdthe trees ’

[for the el ision of008 , see S li t. 2 ] 0007207272000for 022072 8720220[seeS li t. [S li t 0007207272080[8 230 But the long vowelalso m ay be used : as, 000720727207202 70, 7 ]

Why do we except the affixes of the Ice. and gen . sing Because in00072072720222 222 2' [87109] and 00072072720880[8 60 the short vowel is retained .

K WA CH ID NA SINYOR LOPA H .

When 737787: and the affixes of the abl . and 100. sing ,follow

,in certain

cases the final 22 of the noun i s elided : as,V007207272 2i [8 130 00072072720[8 60

( that is, in this form of the abl . we el ide the final 0of 00072072720to avoidthe necessity of lengthening it by S li t. 1 1 and sim ilarly in this form of the

100. we elide it to avoid such a word as000720727200. I n 0007207272000, etc., and

0007207272022 2 222 2' we see the opposite ; 02. also vi.

IDUTOH sA so NO .

I n nouns ending in 2 and 22 , 220is substituted for008 , the afifix of the ace.

plural : as, 4002 2 20, 0022 220, for0922 222 , fires,

’ 0dy2’

2 22 , wm ds.’

NA so VA .

I n nouns ending in 2'

and 22 , 220is optionally substituted for 7202 8 , the affixof the gen. sing. : as, A ggino or0002880, 0022 220or0272 2 880(for 880, see Sat.

JA SA seHA o Y tiTWA M .

I n these nouns, 0i s substituted for j08 , the afiix of the nom . p1ur. ; and

i and 232 3 for the final 2'

and 2 2 . F rom the use of the 072 22 in the Sfi tra we

infer that 220is also used as well as0: as,A ggio, 027720, or0992220, 0022 220.

1 The Com m . gives no ex. of the ace . plural . I t should be 000707272 27.The usual form is000720727207 ;

2 A ll the gram m arians agree that 8 242 i s here the p 207y072 2ir0of all the

case-afiixes (form ed from 8 22 , the first aff , and the p of sup ,the last) , and the

Prak . Sanj . and Prak . Sarvaswa refer hither etc. of. S . 7 , note.

3 T he00in the Com m ., which is added in the m argin in som e MSS . to

s e er . v ] or Y A R A RUCH I . 145

TA NA . ( 1 2 )I n these nouns 2 2 27 i s substituted for 727, the affix of the instrum ental sing

as, 490722 27, 02722 22 27.sunnrssursuDIRGHA H .

When 8 22 , 072 28, and the afi‘ixes of the nom . sing ,

instr. plur., and

100. plur . foll ow, the final 2°

or 2 2 of these nouns is exchanged for its longvowel : as, 14997, 02772 ; 22997727222 , 02772 727222 ; 00078 2 2 , 0072 8 22 .

srnrvfm sasA UDOT A U . ( 1 9)I n fem inine nouns, 2 2 and 0are substituted for 308 , the affix of the ace.

plural : as,

31012 11 , m alae natu, nai o vahun, vahuo.

11 2 1021, ‘

garlands ’; nadib , rivers ’; vadhuh,‘wives .’

[ JA SO via ]I n fem in ine nouns, 2 2 and 0are optionally substituted for j08 , the afiix of

the nom . plural ; in the al ternative these foll ow the rule of nouns in0: as

M0700, 22 2 2772722 , and also 222 27727 (by S .

A M I HRA SWA H .

I n fem inine nouns the final long vowel i s shortened before 022 2 , the afiixof the ace. sing : as,

Malam , na’

im , vahum .

TANA SNINAM I DEDA DAZT A H .

I n fem inine nouns, 0, 0, 27 are substituted for 727, the affixes of

the instr., gen. and loe. sing. as,

K ati, naie, naia, nai a , any one of which four form s represents ‘by,

’of

’

or m’i

a river.

’

NATO ’D2iT A U .

I n the case of fem inine nouns ending in 27, two of the above substitu

tions 0and 27 do not take place ; that is, the legitim ate influence of the

preceding Sli tra is here prohibited : as,

I 1 0 2 t I I 1 ; C t .Mala i , m alae (not m alaa,m alaa ) by, ’ of,

’or m a garland.’

the Sli t , m ust only m ean here 0y0002572 772 2'

7002’7272 27d 2 27 [0f. iii . when0i s used, 7 and 72 m ust precede it, but not in the ease of 2 20 cf. L ass . p . 307 .

F or 22 2 27727, cf. L ass ,p . 307 , note 2 , and Boehtl . gale ,

p . 1 50,on

2700222 272 2 27 (\Villiam s’

ed . p . 6 ; cf. also p . 1 6 5,

146 THE PRA

,

K R I T A PR A K A'

S

'

A [sner v .

o

AniT A U BA HUL A M .

I n fem inine words ending in 27, 27 and 7 are irregularly interchanged as

the final letter : as,

Saham ana,saham ani ; haladda, haladdi suppanaha, suppanahi

'

; chhaba,chhab i.Saham ana,

‘

enduring ’

; haridra,‘ turm eric ’

[i . 1 3 ] surpanakha,‘

Ré

vana’s sister ’

; chhaya,‘shade ’

[ii .

NA NA PUNSA K E .

The final vowel i s not lengthened in the nom inati ve sing. of a neuternoun (in nouns ending in0there i s no rule which would enj oin i t ; but thoseending in 2

’

and 22 , but for this prohibition, m ight have com e wi thin the

range of Sat. as,

Dahim , m ahum , havim .

Dadhi,‘curdled m ilk ’

; m adhu, honey ’

; havis, ghee .

’

I JJA ss'

A son DiRGA seHA .

In neuter nouns, 2° is substituted for j08 and 808, the affixes of the nom .

and ace. plural, and the preceding vowel is lengthened : as,Vanai, dahii, m ahui .2

NAMA NTRA NE SAV OTWA DIRGHA VINDA VA H .

Wh en the nom . sing. i s used in the sense of the vocative ( this beingconsidered by Sanskrit gram m arians as only a m odification of the nom inative

, )neither the 0of S li t . 1 , nor the long vowel of S li t . 1 8 , nor the anuswara of

Sat. 30, are allowed : as,

H e vachchha,‘O tree ’

; he aggi ,‘0fire ’

; he vau,‘0wind ’

; he vana, 3‘

o forest ’; he dahi,‘

o curdled m ilk ’

; he m ahu,

‘

o honey.’

STRI YAM ATA E T .

I n the vocative of fem inine nouns, 0i s substituted for 27 before the affix

The Prak . Sanj i v. explains this Sat. thus : 8 72 2 7772290 p ré

723202727 2727 27 7 2700702 2 p 2070070222 600007072 72 272'

72 72'

7208yd72 , 7208027222 027jj 272

'

, y08y2772 , 500802722 2 etc. The MS . D has these ex. as

genitives (of. Var. L ect .) added to those given by the other MSS . F or 7072,etc . , cf. vi . 6 . This explanation is m uch m ore probable than Bham aha

’s .

2 The m ore com m on form s are 0022 27722 2 , etc., the nasal being addedby iv. 1 6 .

3 Of. Pai n , vi . 1 , 6 9, and Boehtl . Com m .

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

148 TH E PRKK R I T A PR A K A SA [sner v .

the nom . sing. ; and from the in the Sutra we infer that 02 0is alsoused : as,

Pi a , piaro ; bhaa, bhaaro ; Jam aa , Jam aare .

‘

ATMA NO T m iNo vri . (45 )41012 3 2 20i s optionally substituted for the word 277222022 , self’

: as,

A ppano, appa.lEli

‘

or the latter form , see iii .

BRA HMADYI ATMA VA T . (47 )The words bra/2 2220, etc.,

are properly declined like 27722 2022 : as,

Vam ba,vam hano ; j uva, juvano ; addha, addhano.

Brahm an, Brahm a’

; yuvan, a youth ’

; adhwan, a path .

’ Othersim ilar instances are to be determ ined in conform ity w ith the exam ples given.

1 The long list of Sutras on which are inserted here in three MSS .are om itted in the translation, as there can be little doubt that they form edno part of the original text of Vararuchi . They are found in the Sanksh.

Szira (of. L ass . p . 3 1 5 , note) and the Prak . Sanj ., but their diffuse phraseologyis very different to Vararuchi’s usual style .

F or som e further rules on Declension see vi . 60— 64.

sne'

r. vi ] or VA RA RUCH I . 149

SE CT ION THE SI X TH .

ON PRONOUN S,are.

SARVADER JA SA E TWA M .

Jae,the affix of the nom . plural , becom es 0when it foll ows the class of

words called 8 22 2 2 27777 as,

Savve, j e, te, ke , kadare .

Sarve,‘

all’

; ye,‘who ’

; te,‘they ’

; he,(

who katare, whi ch of two .

371 2 11 SSIMMM I T THAH .

8 8 72 2 2 , 77720are substi tuted for the affix of the lee. sing ,when

foll owing a pronoun : as,

Savvassim ,savvam m i , savvattha ; iarassim , iaram m i, iarattha.

C o oSarvasm in in all i tarasm in ln another.

”1 7

I DA MET A T K IMYA T T A DBHYA SH TA I NA VA'

.

[ 2 2 27 i s optionally substituted for 727, the affix of the instr. sing , after

22722 22 2 ,‘this ’; 0707,

‘thi s ’; 72 722 2 ,‘

what 7 ’

3207,‘what, ’ 707,

‘that ’: as,

I m ina, edina, kina, j ina , tina im ena, edena, kena, jena, tena .

AMA E SIM .

13872 2 is optional ly substituted for 2722 2 , the affix of the gen . plur ., after

the above words 277022 2 , etc. as,

I m csim or im ana ; edesim or edana ; kesim or kana ; j esim or Jana ;

tesim 02 ' téna .

K IMYA T T A DBHYO NASA A'

SA H .

Vararuchi, in this short sketch of pronouns , confines him self to theirpecul iar inflexions, and for the m ost part assum es the rules of Sect . v .

2 [ 22 2080722 2 c . Sat . 1 5 ] i s used as Ice . fem . in Sak . Ewill . p . 3 6 .

3 £ 8 722 2 i s used in the fem . as well as the m asc . (f. Hem a-ch.

1 50 THE PRAK R I T A PRA K As’

A VI .

{730is optionally substituted for 2203 , the affix of the gen . sing , after thepronouns 72 2222 , 722 7 : as,

Kasa or kassa ; jasa02° jassa ; tasa or tassa.

IDBHYA S ssA SE .

Sad and 80are substituted for 2203 , after the above pronouns, when theyare declined like nouns ending in 2 from fem inine roots of the form72 2

, j 2'

, as,

Kissa, kise, k i a , k ie, k ia, kn ,‘

of what wom anP’

; j i ssa, j i se, j ia, j ie, j ia,j ii,

‘

of what wom an’

; tissa, tise, 2 22 , tie, tia, tii,‘

of that wom an.

"[For

the other form s given, see v.NEE H IM .

£ 2 222 is optionally substituted for 222 (the affix of the lee. sing. ) after72 222 2 , (007, 707 : as,

Kahim , kassim ,kam m i , kattha Eof. v . jab im , jassim , jam m i, j attha ;

tahim , tassim , tam m i, tattha.

AHE I A K ALE .

I nstead of 22 2 in the sense of tim e Eof. Parr , v. 3 , 27720and 227 are

optionally substituted after the above pronouns : as,

Kahe, jahe, tithe ; ka'

i'

a,ja’

ia, ta’

ia and also the form s (in vi . 7 )kahim , etc.

Kada,

‘

when ’

; yada,‘since ’

; tada, then .

’

T TO no NA SEH .

I nstead of 2208 2, the affix of the abl . sing , 770and do are substituted afterthe above pronouns : as,

Katto, kado ; jatto, j ado tatto, tado .K asmat,

(

from yasm at, from which ’

; ta sm at,‘

from that.’

TA DA oseHA .

I nstead of 2203 2, after the pronoun 707, o i s optionally substituted : as,

70, as well as 70770and 70270(the final 7 i s dropped by iv. 6,and the 22 is

el ided before0by iv .NASA SE .

T he option allowed in the preceding Sti tra still continues . S0i s op

These refer to the fem inine gen. sing , and correspond to the Sans .l

720832 2772 , etc. Sce,L ass .

, p . 3 2 2 , and the Sanksh . Sara quoted there . I t i ssingul ar that W adds 8 72 2 2 2722 2 in the Sutra .

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

15 2 TH E PRAK R I T A P RA K A’

S

'

A [seer vr.

E T A DA S sfivorwau VA . ( 1 9 )

When the pronoun07027 is followed by the nom . sing. affix 8 22, the sub

stitution of 0for 8 2 2 (which by v. 1 i s universal ) is only optional : as, E 80or080, for08720, this.’

T TO NA SEH .

I nstead of 22082, the affix of the abl . sing , when it follow s 07027, 770issubstituted, the 70being elided by S li t. 2 1 as,

E tto. (We have al so the regular form s edado, edadu, edahi.)E tasm at,

‘from this.’

T TOTTHA YOS T A LOPA H .

Wh en the affixes 770ES. and 77720[S. 2 ] follow, the 70of07007 i sdropped : as,

E 2 20,

‘

from this ’; ettha,‘

in this ’

(the final 22 having been droppedby iv.

T A DE TA DOS SA S SAZVA NA PUNSA K E . ( 2 2 )

S is substituted for the 7 of 7027 and07027 in the m asc. and fem ., before 8 2 2 ,the affix of the nom . sing. as,

So puriso,‘this m an

’

; 85. m ahila,‘this wom an ’

; sim ilarly 080[S.

080Why do we specify 80P’ Because it does not hold in the nom . plur.,

0270, or the ace. sing. 0270222 , 7022 2 .

‘

Why do we exclude the neuter ?’

Because we say 70222 , 0270222 ; for 7027, 07027 in the neuter nom . sing.

A B A SO DO MUH .

M 2 2 i s substituted for the 270of the pronoun02708 , before the case-affixes(the final 8 being already dropped by iv. and the word is then decl inedl ike a noun ending in 2 2 : as,

o 0 f oA m u puri so, that m an

’

; am i’

i m ahi la,that wom an

’

; am i'

io puri sa,2 2 2these m en

’

; amuo m ab i lao , these wom en am um vanam , th1 s forest ’;[ 0 [ o

amulm vanaim , these forests .

HA seHA SA U.

H a also i s substituted for the 270of 02708 , before the aflix of the nom .

sing : as,

A ha puriso, aha m ahila, aha vanam .

Thi s 720does not adm it 0, 27 or anuswara, and therefore rem ains thesam e in the three genders .

s E CT . v i ] o r \’

A m a rten r. 1 5 3

PA DA SYA .

This Satra will exercise02772 272 272 2 2 [of i . T he various rules which weshall go through in order, are to be understood as supplying substitutes for21 2 2 22 2722 , or word end ing with a ease-affix ; that is, they will not supplysubstitutes for the case-affixes them selves, nor for a part of the base towhich these m ay be added , but they are to supply substitutes for the wholeword

,base and affix together.

‘

T he02772 272 2720of this Sutra will extend until a 7072 270i s enj oined (or crudeform in eontradistinction to 0220270) which we shall certify, when it occurs .

YUSHMA DA S T A M TUMA M .

T he affix 8 22 is repeated from S . 24. T022 2 and 722 22 2022 2 are substituted forthe pada ‘you , ’ when followed by 8 22 , the affix of the nom . sing .

as. T022 2 , 72 2 22 2022 2 , you .

’

TUMCHfiM I .

F or the pada (022 872 22 2027, when followed by 22 222 , the affix of the ace . sing ,

72 2 22 2 i s optionally substituted ; and , from the use of 0720in the Sutra,we con

elude that 722 222022 2 al so m ay be used as, T 202 2 ,722 222022 2 , thee .

’

T UJJHE TUMB E JA SI .

F or the pada (02 2 872 222027, followed by j 2 2 8 , the affix of the nom . plur.,

72 222720and 722 22 2720are substituted : a8,7 2 222 720, 722 222 720, ye .

’

VOCHA se sr. ( 2 9 )F or the pada followed by 708 , the affix of the ace . plur.

,20i s

substituted,and from the 0720of the Sfitra we conclude that 72212 720and

72 2 22 2720m ay also be used : as,V0

, 72222720, 722 2 2 2720,‘you .’

T i fivos T A T T AE TUMA E TUME . (so)

F or the pada y 22 872 222027 followed by 727 and 22 2, the affixes of the instr. and

loc. sing , 702 , 700, 72 2 22 200and 72 2 22 20are substituted : as,T 22 2 , 700, 72 2 22 200, 72 2 2220,

by thee ,’

or‘

in thee .

’

fiA SI TUMOTUHA TUJJHA TUMHA TUMMX H . (3 1

F or the pada y 22 872 22 2027 followed by 2208 , the affix of the gen. sing , the

the following are substituted : T 2 2 2 2 20, 72 2720, 722 222 720, 722 22 2 22 20,

(

of thee .

’

.{i'

r CHA T E DE .

F or the pada (7 22 872 22 2 22 27, followed by the affix of the instr. sing , and

This is the affix of the instr. sing . in the term inology of the eastern

( 12 2 27072022 ) school of H ind t'nGram m arians : see Boehtl . Panini , I ntrod . p . xii .

154 TH E P R A K m r A PR A K AS'

A [s teer v i .

also by 2208 , the affix of the gen . sing. (which we infer from the use.

of 0720in the Sutra) , 70and 270are substituted : as, T0, 270,

‘by thee,

’and of thee .

’

TUMA'

I CHA . (8 8 )F or the pada (022 872 22 2027 followed by 272 2

, the affix of the instr. sing ,

72 2 222 272 also is substituted : as,1 2 2 22 2 272 ,

‘by thee .

’

TUJJHEH IM TUMHEH IM TUMMEH IM BHI SI .

F or:

the pada (022 872 22 2027 followed by 672 28 , the affix of the instr. plur.,

these are substituted : 722127207022 2 , 72 2 22 272072 2 22 2 , 722 222 222072 222 2 ,‘by you .’

NASAU TA TTO T A IT T O TUMADo TUMADU TUMAH I . (8 8 )F or the pada followed by 2208 2, the affix of the abl . sing , 70770,

e tc., are substituted : as, T0770, 72 2 222 27270

,72 2 22 2 272722 , 72 2 222 2772 2,

‘

from thee .

’

TUME AH INTO TUMHASUNTO BHYA SI .

F or the pada y2 2872m027 followed by the affix of the abl . plur.,

722 222 72 2772 222 70and 7002 72 2780070are substituted : as, T 2 2 222 72 2772 222 70, 722m 72 278 22 22 70,from you.

’

vo BHE TUJJHANA M T UMHANA M AMI .

F or the pada (02 2 872 22 2027 followed by 27222 , the affix of the gen. plur., 220,etc. are substituted ; as, V0, 6720, 701272 270022 2 , 7022272000222 , of you.

’

NA U TUMA MMI . (8 8 )F or the pada 322 2872 222027 followed by 22 2, the affix of the lee. sing , 70222022 2 222 2

is substituted : as, T 2 2 2220222 222 2, in thee .

’By S ti t. 30, we have al so the four

form s, T02‘

, 700, 722 22200, 7 2 2 2220.

TUJJHE SU TUME ESU SUPI . (8 9 )F or the pada followed by SW) , the affix of the loc. plur.

, 722j j7208 22and 722 222 7208 22 are substituted : as, 1022 7208 22 , 72 2 222 7208 22 , in you .

’

A SMA DO HA M A HA MA HA A M SA U .

F or the pada 08222027, I,

’followed by the affix 8 2 2

, 720222 , 0720222 , 07200222 are

substituted, as, H am,0720222 , 07200222 , I .

’

A HA MM I R A M I CHA .

F or the pada08 22 2027 followed by the affix 0222,0720222 222 2 is substituted

, and

from the 070of the Sutra we infer that it m ay al so be sim ilarly substitutedfor the nom . as, A 72022 2 22 2 2, I

,

’ 02' m e.

’

MA M MA MA M . (42 )A 222 is repeated from S i’i t . 41 . F or the pada08 222027, followed by the affix

t0222 , 2 2 2022 2 and 2 22022 2022 2 are subst1tuted : as, 71022 2 , 2 2202 2 20222 , m e.

’

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

f I !

156 THE I‘R A K R l'

l‘

A PR A K A S A [SECT . v 1 .

MA MA MM I NA U . ( 5 2 )

F or the pada08 22 2027 followed by the affix 22 2, 22 2022 2020202 i s substituted : as,

0 o I

77702002022 2 2 , 1 11 m e .

’F rom Sut. 46 we have also the form s, 2 2 202 , 2 2 200.

A MHE SU SUPI .

F or the pada 08 22 2027 followed by the affix sup , 0222 72080i s substituted : as,

oA 2 2 272080, ln us.’

DWE R DO .

T he adhikara of 120270ends here [of S . Sup m ust be repeated fromthe last but in the sense of the 12 207y07202~0[see v . 1 2

,note] , and not

as m erely confined to the loo. plur.

F or the word 27202,‘ two , ’ 270is substituted before the case-affixes : as,

Do72 2222 , by two 27080, in two.

’

TRE S T IH .

F or the word 72 2, three, ’ before the case-affixes, 72 i s substituted (and theword is then decl ined l ike nouns ending in 2 as

,T 77222 2 2 ,

‘by three ’

; 7780in three.

’

TINNI JA ss‘

A SBHYA'

M . (5 6 )F or the word 72 2, together with the case-affixes j08 and 708

, 7222 2 2 2 i s substituted : as, T 222 2 2 2000270, three are com e

’

; 722 2 2 2 2 12 2072 72720, behold three.

’

DWER DUVE DON I VA . (5 7 )F or the word 27202, together with the ease-affixes j08 and 7808 , 27020and 2702 2 2

o 5

are substi tuted : as, D020, 27022 2 , two ’

the form 270ES.

CHA TURA s CHA T TARO CHA T T A’

RI .

F or the word 0720702 , together with the affixes j as and 308, 072077020and

we have also the option of using

072077272 2 are substituted : as,

07207702 2 2 2 2 22 28 27, ‘

four m en’

; 07207702007207702 2 120727720, ‘behold four.

’

E SHAM {£b NHA M. ( 59 )I nstead of0222 , as the gen. plur. affix of these words 2002

, 72 2, 0720702 , wehave the form 2 272022 2 : as

,

'

Do2272022 2 ,‘

of two ’

; 7222 72022 2 ,‘

of three ’

;

of four.

’

am ho am ho am hz'

ina m am ana m ahana m ajjhana A 20720occurs in Dr.

T rithen’

s ed . of the Mahaviracharitra, p . 2 8

,1 2 .

1 Cf. Var. L ect . The 7 seem s absolutely required by v . 1 8 . and vi . 60.Or rather, 2 72002 272022 2 , the reading of one MS .

S ECT . v i ] or Y A R A RUCH I .

sE s‘no ’

DA NT A VA T .

T he rest of the rules for declension are the sam e as those for words endingin 0. Thus the Sutra072 28072 220, which has been given for words ending in 0[cf v . 5 ] applies equally to words ending in 2 and 2 2 ; thus we have009772 220,0022 72 220from aggi and 2022 ; and sim ilarly for fem inine words ending in0, 2,and 22 : as 1017072 2 22 2 , 2 2 22 572 220, 200072 2 222 Ev . I n the sam e way we have099 23 30, 200830as the gen. sing ,

and 0595270, 700270, etc.

,for the abl . sing ;

and sim ilarly (70722 22 2 , 7272 222 2 [vi 54, 0720072 220.N A i i i as E DAiT A U .

E and0are not used as the substitutes of the affixes 22 2 and 2203 2 [of v . 6

and v . 9] in the case of noun s end ing in 2 and 0: as, 409 22022 2 2 ‘

in the

fire’

; 20020202 , ‘

in the wind ’

; 059 2270,0097270, 2209772 2, ‘

from the fire 200270,

20002722 , 20072 2, from the wind .

’

E B l IYA SI . (6 2 )

T he negative is repeated from the previous Sdtra . E i s not substitutedfor the final letter of nouns ending in 2 or 0, when follows : as , A ggi

2 202 2 2 70,0002802 2 70, from the fires ’; 20072 2070, 200802 2 70, from the wm ds .

’

DWIVA CHA NA SYA BA HUVA CHA NA M .

I n all affixes , whether for the case s of noun s or the persons of verbs,we m ust use the plural instead of the dual ; thus we m ust say, 220072072720,‘two trees ’ ‘by two trees, ’ etc . ; and sim ilarly for verbs ; as,072 2777202 2 72, they two stand .

’

CH A TURTHYAIH SHA SHTHI.

In stead of the affix of the dative case , we m ust use that of the genitive ;thus, 2020720008800072 2, 202072022022027072 2 ,

‘

give to the Brahm an’

; or‘

to the

Brahm ans .’

1 Cf. Var. L ect. E and not0seem s the true reading, because in factthe form with0i s only evolved from the Sutra v . 1 2

,by the aid of the 0720

[of v . 7 , note] ; the original form s being no doubt 0007207272072 22 2 70, etc. This

being not observed by the copyists has occasioned the Var. L ect .0.

158 THE PRAK M T A PRA K AS’

A [SE0T . VI I .

SE CT ION THE SEVENTH .

ON CONJUGA T I ON .

T A T I POR IDE T A U .

F or 70and 7210(the affixes of the 1st person ‘ in the0722 20220and p0208 22 2022 and0are m utually substituted : as,Padha‘

r, padhae f02 pathati, pathate, he recites .’

Tnfissrros si SE .

F or 77208 and 8 242 (the afiixes of the 2 nd . person sing. in the 07222 . and

1202 . p ad0) , 8 2 and 802 are m utually substituted as,

Padhasi, padhase for pathasi , pathase.

I TM I POR M IR .

F or 27 and 22 2 242 (the affixes of the 3rd person sing. in the 0722 2 . and p ar.

p a da) 222 2 i s substituted and thus0202772022 2 2 represents both the Sans. 12207720222 2and 1007720.

NT I HET THAMOMUMA BA HUSHU.

F or the conjugational affixes in the plural , 22 72, 720, 277720, 200, 22 20, 22 20areseverally substituted : as,

Padhanti ; padhaha, padhittha ; padham o, padhamu,

padham a.

A T A E SE .

Thi s rule l im its What would otherwise be of constant application. The

0and 80which are substituted by Sutras 1 and 2 are only substituted whenthey follow 22 , and not otherwise ; thus we have 2022 200,

‘

he rej oices,

’

1202772 2 20,

1 T he reader w ill bear in m ind that the H induGram m arians follow an

inverse order to ours in arranging the 1202 8022 8 , their first person being our

third,etc.

2 T he apparent confusion in Sfi tras 1 , 2 , (as 8 2 properly 8 212 , not 77208 ,etc.) seem s intended to prepare us for Sil t. 5

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

1 60 TH E l ’R .i [sne'

ix VI 1 .

of the present added to this) as,

Hohii ,‘

he will be ’

; hohinti,‘ thcy will be ’

; hasihn ,‘

he will laugh ’

;

hasihinti, they will laugh .

’

UT T A ME ssi H i CHA .

I n the 3rd person [cf note S il t . I ] of the future we are to use after theroot 8 80and 720and also 72 2 (as we infer from the 0720in the Sutra) as

,

o o o o I oHossz

’

tm i , hohz'

nn l,hohim l , I shall be ’

; hossz'

uno,hoham o

,holm no

, we

shall be .

’

M INA SSA M v.81

I n the 3 rd person sing. of the future, 88022 2 m ay optionally be used afterthe root

,superseding the personal affix 2 2 2 2 as,

K ossam , I shall be .

’ This being optional , we m ay al so use the form s ofthe preceding Sfi tra .

[MOMUMA I R H I SSA:I n‘

the 3rd person plural of the future, 7228 80and 72277720m ay be optionally,added after the root, instead of any substitute for a plural -affix, superseding2220, 2 2 20, or 2 22 22 : as,

Hohisszi , hohitthé,‘

we shall be ’

; hasihissa, hasihittha, we shall laugh .

’

A s this is optional , we m ay also use the previous forms. 2

[ K a t -DrisRU-VA CHL GA ML RUDL DRISL VIDI -Rurfnyéu f

HA M Di HA M SOCHCHHAM VOCHCHHA M GA CHCHHA M ROCHCHHAM DA CHCHHA M VE CHCHHA M fi

]I n the 3 rd person sing. of the future, instead of the roots 72 2 2

,etc .

,

72072022 2 , etc . are respectively substituted : as,

K ziham ,

‘

1 will do ’

; dz’

iham,

‘

1 will give ’

; sochchham ,

‘

I will hear ’

;

voehehham ,

‘

I will speak ; ’ gaehchham ,

‘

I will go ’

; rochchham ,

‘

I willweep dachchham ,

I will see vechchham,I w ill know

,

’

etc.

Sutras 1 5— 2 2 are only found in part of the MSS ., but Hem a-ch., and

the Prak . Sanj . give them ; and as several of them are of som e value,I add

Hem a-chandra’s corresponding rules.2 H em e-ch , 1 6 5 , M0222022 20220222 72 288072 277720, and 1 6 6 , 222072 8 8022 2 .3 Hem a-eh.,

1 6 7 , E 207072022 2 , w ith ex. 720720200072022 2 ; then 1 6 8 , fi20-g22 20220272 -02272 07272 2272 072 2272 -072 2 2202080072720222 g0072720222 2007272 22 22 2220072720222 , etc. The Sanskrit Gram m arians frequently add an 2 to a verbalroot

,in order to decline it in their S i’i tras. See Sect . viii . 12 22 88 222 2 .

SEC'I‘. V I L ] or vxnxnm'

ru. 1 6 1

[sawi nixi n T RISWA PYA NUSwi l tA VA m A N H I LOPA S'CHA

vi i i ]8007207272020, etc . (without the anuswara) are substituted for 5820, etc. in

the future, even when the signs of the first, second, or third persons follow ;the el ision or insertion of 72 2 (Sl

’

l t . 1 2 ) is optional : as,

Sochchhii, sochchhihii,‘

he will hear ’

; sochchhinti , sochchhihinti,‘they

will hear ’

; sochchhisi , sochchhihisi , thou wilt hear ’

; sochchhitthai , sochchhi

hittha, ye w ill hear’

; sochchhim i , sochchhihim i ,‘

I will hear ’

; sochchhim o,

sochchhihim o,sochchhim u, sochchhihimu, sochchhim a, sochchhihim a, soch

chhissz’

rm o [S li t sochchissz’

rmu,sochchhissz

'

t m a,

‘

we will hear.

’A nd

sim ilarly vochchha , etc .

[U-SU-MU vrnnr i m snwnxxsm n.

2

JU 8 22 2 2 2 22 are severally substituted for the proper singular affixes in the

sense of com m and , etc . [of Pri nini iii . 3 , 1 6 1 and as,

Hasaii, let him laugh ’

; hasasu, do then laugh ’

; hasamu,‘

let m e laugh .

’

[NTU-HA -MO BA HUSHUF ]N707202 2 20are severally substituted for the proper plural affixes in the

sense of com m and, etc. ; as,

B asanta ,‘

let them laugh ’

; hasuha,‘

laugh ye’

; hasam o,

‘

let us laugh .’

[VA RT A MANA BHA VI SHYA DA NA DYA T A NA YOR JJA U ri

Jja and are Optionally substituted for the proper affixes of the

present and the definite future , and also when com m and, etc . are im plied ;

H em a-ch. 1 69 , 80072720270y0y02728720(explained in Com m . by72 27072072 22 20.

H em a-ch. 1 70, 008022 20 with the ex.,

720802000720222 , etc. ; the Com m . adds 272 2,

S . 1 7 1 , 802 72 22 00is new, as i s 1 7 2 , A 70 with Com m .,

808 8 77202 20‘

227080’ ‘

2220’27007070720720027030207272000072.

This is Hem a-eh.,1 73 .

4H em a-eh .,1 74, jj0yj ci00. For Com m .,

of. notes pp . 64, 6 5 ; also of. 20227 for the other interpr. in the MSS .

,som e

of which understand by i

the im perative and other tenses ’;H em a -eh. notices the variation [cf var. lect .

,p . 6 5 ] but. gives as above ,

which agrees with iii . 3,1 6 1 , 1 6 2 .

16 2 TH E PR A K R I T A PRA K A

'

sA [SE C'

L vn .

there being an option, the previous form s m ay be retained . Thus we havein the present 720170, 720220, or 7202,

‘

he is ’

[024viii. 720801722 , 72080270, or

720802 , he laughs ’

; (and the sam e form appl ies to the three persons in bothnum bers ; ) in the future 720270, 720220, or 7207222, etc.,

he w ill be ’

; and sim ilarly in the sense of the im perative .

[MA DHYE

and 120are al so optionally inserted between the root and the affixe sin the present, the definite future and the im perative as,

(Present) hojja’

i'

,hojj

‘dl ; (future ) hojjahii , hojjéhii ; ( im perative) hojjau,hojja

'

iu.

[NANE K ACHA HJ ( 2 2 )and 170, however, are not thus inserted between the root and affix,

except when the root ends in a vowel (and i s therefore m onosyllabicsince a root which ends in a consonant becom es dissyllabic by the additi on of

the anubandha) as,

H asa‘

r‘

f20222 hasa ,‘to sm ile ’

; tuvara i f2 o22z twara,‘to hasten.

’ But thisdoes not preclude their being em ployed as final s (by S . 20) as

,Hasejja, -jj é ;

tuvarejja, -jjé, etc.

22 . BHuT E .

702 i s substituted for the affix after a root in a past tense as,

Huvia, hasia fo2 abhavat , he was,’ahasat, he laughed.’

Hem a-eh. 1 75 , Madfiye07208 2 2202022 7027 00. 8 2022 2022 7027 277207072 12 2072 2 272p207y0y0y02 20000y0, 0720720207 2 20732000002007208 7720220, 170170000720007072

02070027287200720. T he ex. of the future are 72027072 22,720j j07222, 720220, 720220, 1 2072 872072072 22, which I have supplied above

,as all Vara

ruchi’s MSS . om it them , except W,which erroneously reads 7201702 like the

present. H em a-eh. al so applies the form s to all the persons .2 F or Sdtras 2 3 , 24, of. Lass . I nst., p . 3 54. Som e MSS . seem to have

20for 20, but the Sanksh . Sz’

i ra and H em a-ch . have 20. T he latter’s Sli trasare as follow “

S i 72 2 72 200720702 700800. I nstead of the affixes of the third andother preterites p 207y 20y007222 702 77208 ) 8 2 72 2 and 72 20are substituted ; and as the 20of the next rule is restricted to a root ending in a

consonant, we infer that this rule appl ies to one ending in a vowel : as,708 2,

72072 2, 72072 20for07202 872 27, 22702 207, 07200020from 2 2

Vya 2 2j 22 2 2027 20. F or the

affixes of the thi rd and other preterites, after a root ending in a consonant,

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

164 THE PR A K R I T A PR A K A SA [SECT . V I I

1 7 is optionally substituted for the final of a root ending in 0, when 2 2 2 22 )

follows : as,

C

Hasam i or hasam l,I laugh .

’

I CHCHA BA HUSHU.

I is substituted (as well as0) for the final 0, in the 1 st person plural : as,B asim o, haszirno, hasimu, hasamu, we laugh .

’

E TE .

I i s substituted for the final 0when 72 70(the affix of the past participle)follows : as,

H asiam , padhiam for hasitam ,laughed, ’ pathitam ,

recited .’

E CHA K TWKTUMUNTA VYA BHA VI SHYA T SU .

t en the affixes 72 7200, 72 2 222 22 2 2 , and follow, and also in the futuretense, 0i s substituted for 0; and also 2 , as we infer from the 0720of theSutra : as,

Haseuna,hasm na, having laughed ’

; haseum ,hasium ,

‘

to laugh ’

; haseavvam , hasiavvam ,

‘

( it is) to be laughed ’

; hasehii , hasihii ,‘

he w ill laugh .

’

LanEsE VA.

E i s optional ly substituted for a final a , wherever it is followed by asubstitute for 7 2 (or in other words, in any person of any tense) as,

Hasei or hasa i , he laughs basenti or basanti , they laugh .

’

I This 0seem s Optional by Sli t. 30; hence we have such form s as72080222 22 cf. Sut. 4.

2 Of. Pain . iii .4, 7 7 .

seer . v i i 1 .] o r vxm rwem . 1 6 5

SE CT ION THE E IGHTH .

BHUVO HOHUV

A C .

F or the verbal root072 22 , i to be, ’ 720and 72000are substituted as,

Hoi,huva'

r'

,he is ’; honti, huvanti ,"they are .

’

K T E HUH .

When 0720. i s followed by 770, the affix of the past participle, 72 22 i ssubstituted : as,

Huam ,

l been.

’

PRi DER BHA VA H .

When foll ows a preposition,as 17 20, etc .

, is substituted : as,

Pabhava'

i'

for prabhavati,(

he prevail s ’

: sam bhava‘

r’

far sam bhavati,‘

he

i s born .

’

TWA RA S TUVA RA H .

F or the root 72007' ( 222720020) to hasten, ’ 702020is substituted : as,

Tuvara i , he hastens .’

K T E TURA H .

IVhen 7200r i s followed by the participial affix 72 70, 722 20is substituted : as ,Turiam [for the 2 , cf. vi i .

GHUNO GHOL A H .

F or 972 2 2 220(which in the Dhatupatha or‘

glossary of roots,

’ i s arrangedwith 97202 2 20in the sense of rolling ’

) (172070is substituted : as,

Ghola'

i’

,he rolls .’

NUDO NOLL AH .

F or the root 72 2 2 27 to send,

’720770is substituted : as,

Nolla’

x‘

,he sends ’; panolla

'

i, he drives .’ 2

Or perhaps 72 72072 2 ; cf. Var. L ect .Others read 70720for 720770, and two MSS . insert both rules, but this only

proves that it is an old Var. L ect . I n Sect . iv. , we have som e instances ofa sim ilar transposition of the nasal , as02 2070, etc .

1 6 6 TH E P RA K R I T A PR A K A’

SA [sner V I I I .

m am DITMA H . (a )F or the root 2722 ( 2772 72 2722 7720is substituted as,

Dum a‘

i‘

,

‘

he is pained .’

PA TEH PHA LA H ‘

F or the root 3707 (07070, given in the t '

ttupatha with 070, in the senseof

i

going 3772070is substituted as,

Phaliam hiaam , m y heart is gone ’

PA DEH PX LA H .

F or the root p00170270 17070is substituted : as,Palei,

‘

he goes .’

VRI SHA K HI SHA MR I SHA HRI SHXM R I TO 'RIH . ( 1 1 )

A 7 2 is substituted for the 7 2 of the roots02 2072 , etc. as,

Varisa‘

i, it rains ’; karisa

’

l'

,

‘

he drags ’; m arisa’

t,

‘

he bears patiently ’

;

harisa’

i , he i s glad.’

R I TO ’RA H .

A 70i s substituted when a root ends in 77 2 as,

Mri ,‘to die

,

’m ara

’

i‘

; sri,‘to go, ’ sara

’

f ; vri , to choose,’ vara i .

K RINA H KUNO v2 .

is Optionally used for the root 777 2 ( 202270272 )Kuna'

i’ 07: karat ,

‘

he does .’

JB I BHO JA MBHAA H .

F or 272072 (2 72072 2 i

to yawn, ’2072 207200i s substituted as,

Jam bhaa'

i'

, he yawns .’

GRA B ER GENHA H .

For 97072 gr0720i to seiz e

,

’

9077720i s substituted as,

Genha’

i, he seiz es .’

GHE T xTwATUMUNT A VYE SHU .

07207 i s substituted for grab, when followed by 72 7200, the affix of the ia

declinable participle , 722 772 22 72 , that of the infinitive , and that of thefuture participle : as

,

Ghettuna,‘having seiz ed ’

; ghettum ,

‘to seiz e ’

; ghettavvam ,

‘to beseiz ed. 2

1 The Prak. Sanj . reads 1707072 177207072 , and restricts it to the causal .2 I f 77 be the correct reading in the exam ples, we m ust read 377207 or 972077

for 21720. Cf. Var. L ect ., and transl . , notes, iv . 2 3,and viii ., 5 5 .

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

1 6 8 1 1 1 13 PRA K R I T A P RA K A S

’

A [snm x V I I I .

Thaanti, they stand ’

; jhaanti,‘they m editate ’

; gaianti, they sing.

’

[(rHSJHKGi seHA VA RT A MX J A BH A VI SHYA DVIDHYA'

DYE K A

VA CHA NE SHU.

F or the roots and {102, when followed by the singular affixesof the im perative, the fil ture , and the present, 7720, j 720, and yd are severallysubstituted

,as well as the substitutes m entioned in the preceding S i

’

l tra (as

we infer from the0720in the present one) as,

Thai or théa'

f,‘

he stands ’; thahii 07' thaahu,‘

he will stand ’

; than or

thaaii,let him stand ’

; and sim ilarly jhai 07° jhz’

ta‘

f, jhéhu07' Jh‘dall ll

, jht’

tuor

jht’

i au, gt

'

i i or gt’

ihu or gt'

tahii , gai n or gaaii .

[K HKDI DHAVYOH K HADHA UJF or the roots 737200( 7720022 ‘to eat ,

’and (772027 to run, ’ 72720

and0720are substituted in the sam e tenses as in the preceding S i’

i tra as,

K h-zt i,

‘

he eats ’

; hh-zthh,

‘

he will eat ’

; kht’

tu,‘

1et him eat’

; and sim ilarly dha

’

t i,dht

'

ihii, dht’

iu.

GRASER VI SA H ;

F or the root gm s (given in the Dhatup. in the list grasu, glam , in the

sense of eating ’

) 2 2190is substituted as,

Visa 1 ,‘

he eats .’

CHINA s CH I t H .

F or the root 072 2' ( 2 772 522 to gather, ’072 2720i s substituted : as,

China’

i , he gathers .’

K niNA H K im H . (so )

F or the root 72 70(02270372 to buy, ’ 72 2720is substituted : as,

Kinai',he buys .’

VE H K K ECHA .

117 20i s the substitute for 7577 2, when preceded by the preposition72 2720al so , as we infer from the 0720in the Sutra as,

Vikkei or vikkinai'

[for the 2 2 , cf. iii . ‘

he sells.’

UD-DHMA UDDHUMi .

F or the root 2772 7720, ‘to blow,

’ when preceded by the preposition a t,

220072022 20is substituted as,

Uddhum ai .

snhno DHO DA HA H .

F or the root 27720( 2722072022 ‘to hold, ’ when preceded by the particle

sum : v 1 1 1 .] o r 1 69

070720is substituted : as,

Saddaha’

i,

‘

he believes ’; saddahiam , believed .

’

A yn-{D GSHER vs'

HA H . (34)F or the root ga

’

h (g072 2’2 ‘to churn, ’ etc., when preceded by the pre

position 20720is substituted : as,

Ovéha'

i or avavaha'

i'

,he bathes [of iv.

K ASE R vi s ta‘

Preceded by is continued from the foregoing Sutra . F or the

root 7208 to cough , ’ when preceded by 0220, 2 1080i s substituted : as,

Ovasa’

i’

or avavasa‘

f,

‘

he coughs .’

NIRO M i NA H .

F or the root 7720( 772077 to m easure, ’ when preceded by the preposition7720720is substituted : as

,

Nim m ana'

f, he m akes .’

K SH IYO JH I JJA H .

F or the root 7372 7,‘to destroy, ’ j 72 2

'

jja i s substituted : as,

Jhijja'

i,

‘

he destroys.’

BH IDI CHHI DOR A NTYA SYA NDA H .

For the final of the roots 672 20 ‘to break, ’ and 07272 20(07272 2027 )to cut

,

’

72 270is substituted : as,

Bhinda'

i ,(

he breaks ’; chhinda 1 ,‘

he cuts .’

K WA THE R DHA H .

F or the final of the root 77200772 ( 70007720‘to boil

,

’0720is substituted : as,Kadha'

l‘

,he boils .’

vnsnrns’

enh . (40)0720is al so substituted for the final of the root 22 8872 7 ( to

surround ’: as

,

Veddha’

i ,‘

he surrounds.’ Thi s and the preceding Sutra, which m ightotherwise have been united, are separated on account of the latter of the two

[S. 40] which enj oins a substitute for a final conjunct instead of a singleconsonant, and therefore com es wi thin the range of Sect . iii .

1 None of the MSS . write the ex. with 27072 ; but that given above seem sthe natural explanation of the 3100022 27 70902 2 770707 77072 . The Prak. Sanj . iscorrupt here, but seem s to allow a second form 77 2 777202 (by iii . i t gi vesno expl . of yogavibbdga, etc .

, and this would have rather required 72 270077 7720M. ii i .

1 70 TH E PR A’

K R I T A P RA K A'

s

'

A [se er V 1 I 1 .

UT SA MOR L A l—I .

F or the final of the root 776 8727, 70is substituted , when i t is preceded bythe prepositions 2 2 7 and 80772 as,

v ella’

i'

, sam vella’

i .

RUDER VA H .

F or the final of the root 7 2 20( 77 2 2077: to weep,

’

770is substituted as,

Ruva‘

i‘

,he weeps .’

UDO VI JA H .

F or the final of the root my, preceded by 22 7, 270i s substituted as,

cv w a i , he trem bles .’

VRI DHER DHA H .

F or the final of the root 2 7 2072 to increase, ’0720is substituted : as,Vaddha

‘

i,

‘

he increases .’

HANTER MMA H .

M 7720is substituted for the final of the root 72072 to strike as,

H am m a‘

i,

‘

he strikes .’

Rosa /{Din ar DiRGHA TA .

‘

(4a )I n the roots 72 2 872 , etc .

, the vowel i s lengthened as,

Rusa’

i , tusa’

i,susa i , for rushyati ,

‘

he i s angry ’

; tushyati ,‘

he i s pleasedsushyati ,

(

he dries.’

CHCHO VRA JA NR I TYOH .

0720720i s substituted for the final of the roots 2772 17 ( 277070 to go, ’ and72 7

7

27 ( 72 73277i to dance as,

Vachcha‘

i‘

, he goes ’; nachcha'

i‘

,he dances.

YUDH IBUDHYOR JH AH .

J 720i s substituted for the final of the roots y 2 2072 , to fight, ’ and 627072 ,‘to know as,

Jujjha i ,‘

he fights ’

; vujjha i ,(

he knows .’

RUBK ER NDHAM BHA U .

N0720and 772 6720are substituted for the final of 72 2072 ( 77 2 2 2772 27: ‘tohinder as,

Rundha‘

f,rum bha

‘

i'

,

(

he hinders .’

MR I DO L A H .

L0is substituted for the final of the root 772 7 20 to grind as,

Mal a'

i‘

,

‘

he gri nds.’

N acl wkanam S’

ak . p . 1 6 5,1 .

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

17 2 TH E PRAK R I T A PR A K AéA [seer vn 1 .

A t the end of these roots,when the passive 1 is signified, 7770i s to be

em ployed ; but 720m ay al so be used , as we infer from the0720in the Si’i tra : as,Suvva

'

i‘07 sun

'

ijja'

i'

[vii . huvva'

i‘07 huniyya i ; l va

'

i'07 j inijja i

'

; luvva’

i

07 lunijja’

i ; dhuvva'

i'07 dhum yJa

'

i .

Sruyate,‘it is heard ’

; huyate,‘it is offered ’

; Jiyate,‘i t is conquered , ’ etc .

GA MADlNAM DWI TWA M VA .

I n the case of the roots 907720, e tc ., the final letter i s optionally doubledin the passive, (cf. vii . as

Gam m a‘

i , gam ijja‘

i'

; ram m a'

i‘

, ram ijja i ; hassa i , hasijja i .

Gam yate, i t is gone ram yate, i t is played ’

; hasyate, i t is laughed .’

L I HER L I JJHA H .

[477720is substituted for the root 72720i to l ick , ’ in the sense of the

passive : as,

L ijjha'

i,it is l icked .

’

HR I K ROR HiRA K iRA U .

F or the roots 72 7 2' and 72770and 77772 are severally substituted in the

sense of the passive . as,

H ira’

i, i t is seiz ed ,kira 1

,it is done .

’

GRA HER DIRGHO VA .

A long vowel i s optionally substituted for the short0in the root 97072 , inthe sense of the pa ssive : as,

Gahijja'

i' 07 gahijja

‘

f,

‘it is seiz ed .’

E TE NA DINNA'

JJA YA H . (6 2 )

D 2'

72 770, etc., are used as irregular form s for som e participles with theaffix 7 70: thus,

Da ( dudan ) , to give, ’ dinna, given rud ( rudiri to weep, ’ runnam ,

wept ’; tras ( trasi )‘to fear

,

’hi ttham , alarm ed ’

; dah ( dahai to burn, ’

daddham ,burned ’

; ranj ( ranyi ) ,‘to be attached to, ’ rattam

‘

attached to.’

K HI DER vrsriRAH .

2

F or the root 772 20 to be distressed, ’ 7778 22 70i s substituted as,

Virahena visura'

i’ vala,

‘

the m aiden i s distressed by the absence (of her

K RUDHE R .ruRA H .

C

E el/7 772072 our passive ; 672020is the im personal passive of a neuter verb .2 W continues to refer the rem aining Sutras to the passive, but the

A dhikara of S ti t. 5 7 ended, no doubt, at 8 1113. 6 2 .

seer . v 1 1 1 .] or VA RA R UCH I . 17 5

F or 77 2 2 2772 ( 777 220720) to be angry, ’ j 2'2 70is substituted : as ,

Jura'

i,he i s angry.

CH A RCHEs CHA MPA H . (6 5 )F or07207072 to study , ’0720772170is substituted : as,

Cham pa'

i’

,

‘

he studies .’

TE A SE R VA JJA H . (6 6

F or 7708 to fear, ’ 770170is substituted as,

Vajj a’

i'

, he fears .’

MR IJE R LUBHA SUPA U .

F or 772 7 27 ( 772 7 2722 ) to cleanse, ’ 722 6720and 8 22470are substituted : as,

Lubha’

i'07 supa’

i’

,he cleanses .’

VUT T A K HUPPA U MA SJE H .

F or 77208j ( 72 2 7720820) to be im m erged , ’022 770 and 772 2747170are substituted : as ,

Vutta'

i'

,khuppa i ,

‘

he i s im m erged.’

DaisEH PUL A A N I A K K A A VA K K HAH .

‘

F or the root 2772 3 (07 7537 277 i to see ,’

pulaa , 72 20770, and 00077720are

substituted : as,

Pulaa'

i'

,niakka

’

i , avakkha'

i'

, he sees .’

sA K E s T A RA VA A T iRA’

H .

F or the root 707 ( 70777 7‘to be able, ’ 7070,000, and 7770are substituted : as,

Tara'

i‘

, vae'

i'

, tira'

i‘

,he is able .

’

QE SHANAM A DANTA TA .

T he A nuban'

dh'

as

'

of the rem aining roots are elided, and the roots themselves considered as end ing in short 0 thus,Bhram ( bhr

h

am u ) ,‘to wander, ’ bham a

'

i‘

,

‘

he wanders ’

; chub ( ehubito ki ss, ’ chum va

’

i, he kisses .’

T he F ra'

ik . Sanj . reads this Sat , D 7 2 8072 1022 700 -077077720-80072the Sank sh . S t’i ra has a Si

’

i tra, given by Del ius (Rad . Prak .)D72§072 p alm -[Cod 4200] -7270070770-00077720-[Cod . 327720] -800720720770-p07772072 ;so that no doubt we should correct Vararuchi ’s 72 20770to 72 20072072720, which isprobably m eant in the ex. of v . 2 [of p . I n the

‘Mahavira-charita(T rithen

’

s ed .) we twice find the form 17 22 700[p. 99,3, 77 2 2 70072 7007277772007 ; p .

100, 10, 17722 7000775] which is the only form I have m et

with like 17 22 700in the plays . H em a-eh . gives the form s 72 20072072720, 770072072720,02 '0y0072072/20, 000y0y

'

j /20, vaj j0, 00072072020, 07077720, 0077720, 077077720, 000077720,17 22 700, 77 22 700, 72 20, 000080, 17080.

1 74 TH E PR /( K R I T A PR A K A'

SA [se er 1x.

SE CT ION T HE NINTH .

<1This Section will treat of particles following the m ethod of the

Sanskrit gram m arians .

HUM DANA PRICHCHHANI RDHARA NE SHU.

Hum i s a particle used in the sense of giving, asking, or speakingem phatically : as

, _

Hum genba appano 31am ,Go, t ake your life Hum sahnen sabbhavam ,

Wish good to the good Hum havasu tunhikko, Com e , be quiet .’

VI A VE A A VA DHKRA NE .

V722 and 7700are used in the sense of asseveration : as,

Q Q

E vam v1a, evam vea, So, certainly.

o sfioH ANAPA seHKT TAPA VI K A LPE SHU .

0is used in the sense of indi cation, rem orse and indecision ; for exam ple sthe Com m ent. refers us to the 00772072 , or poem s wri tten in Prakr it . 3

I RA K I RA K I LK A NIseHI TAK HYANE .

1 70, 70770, and 70770are used in doubtful assertion : as,

Pekkha ira tena hado, See , he was possibly killed by him .

’

HUM K K HU N ISCH A YA VI T A RK A SA MBHAVA NE SHU . <6 )Hum and 777072 22 are used in the sense of resolution,

doubt, or reflection : as

,

A s this Section treats only of interjections, e tc .,I have not translated

all the exam ples in ful l .2 See L ass . A pp .

,p . 1 89 .

3 The Prakrit of these first nine Seetionsi L assen’

s -

‘

Dialectus PrteeiM ]is pecul iarly the poeticfi

dialegt: I t i s called the Maharashtri in xii . 3 2 .

The Sauraseni is the form em ployed in prose .

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

17 6 THE PRAK R I T A P R A K A S A 1x.

R0, 070, and 72770are used in the sense of addressing a person,or of

delight, or quarrelling : as,

Re m z'

t karehi , Oh ! do not do it ! ’ etc .

MM IVA M IVA VIA IvfiRTHE .

Ill/72 270, 722 7220, and 2 20are used in the sense of like ’

: as,

Gaanam m m iva , (m iva, 07 via, ) kasanam , Black l ike the sky .’

[A JJA AMA NTRA NEJ ( 1 7 )

A JY0is used in the sense of courteous address : as,

A jja m ahanuhava kim karesi , What art thou doing, oh illustrious one

sE SHA H SA NSK RI TAT .

The rem ainder all that has not been treated of] , whether rules forletters, genders, 70272772 270derivatives, com position, or affixes, etc.

,m ust be

learned from the Sanskri t gram m ar (as Prakrit assum es this as i ts basis) ; theyare om itted here from fear of swell ing the treatise beyond its preper siz e.

This Sut. is doubtful, being only found in four MSS . I n the ex. given,0270m ight be for

seer . or VA R A R UCH I . 1 7 7

SE CT ION T HE T ENTH .

m s’

i eHi . <1T he Paiéachi

’ is the dialect of the Piéachas, l or‘

goblins, ’ which (like theother dialects) is explained in this section by definitions and exam ples .

PRA K RI T I H SA URA SENI .T he original:of this dialect that which form s the base on which its

peculiarities are engrafted] is the Saurasem (or the Prakri t dialect peculiarto prose ; 0f. xii

vAnei xi n TRI T IYA CHA TURTHA YOR A Y UJOR A N ziDYORI

A DYA H .

I nstead of the third and fourth letters of each class, when single and

non- initial , we m ust use the first and second respectively [70,7; for g, and

7272 for g72 ; 072 for j , and 07272 for j 72 , etc.] as,

Gakanam, m ekho

,racha, nichchharo, 2 etc.

Gaganam ,

‘

the sky ’

; m eghah, a cloud ’

; raja,

‘

a king ’

; nirjharah,a

cascade, ’

etc.

I VA SYA PIVAH .

P 220is used for 270,

(

like as,

Kam alam piva m akham , A face like a lotus . ’

NO NA H .

1V is used for 72 as ,

rTalun1 for taruni , a g1rl .’

1 I know of no instances of this dialect in any of the plays ; the Rakshasas who are introduced in the Venisam hara speak a kind of A 7 dd72 2 2

2 72 272 2012 2 [cf Lass . p . withou t the two peculiar features of the I ’aifsachi’,the dental nasal , and the substitution of hard for soft consonants .

2 This is not a good ex. , as it should be a 3 272970le tter . I om i t therem aining exam ples .

17 8 THE P a /( K ul 'rA PnA K A'

s

'

A sm x.

SH T A SYA SA TA H .

S070i s used for 87270 as,

K asatam m am a vat ta i , I t is m y sorrow.

SNA SYA SA NA H .

S000is used for 3 720 as,

oSananam for snénam , bathm g .

’

RYA SYA RI A H .

R 20i s used for as,

Bhariaf07 bharya, a wife.

’

JNA SYA NJA H .

Ni is used for jg} : as,

Vinjato, f07 vijnata,‘known.

’

K A NYX YAM NYA SYA . ( 10)Ni i s substi tuted for 723; in the word a girl as,

Kanja.

JJA CHCHA .

072072 i s used for the j ] , which in the Sauraseni dialect is substituted for73/ [0f. iii . as,

K acheham f07 karyam , to be done.

’

m im e RACHI TKNA SINA SNI SHU v7 .

1 200727 i s Optionally used for 7 dj a 72 , a king, ’ before the case-affixes of theinstr.

, abl ., gen .,and loc. singular : as, instr., 70072 2720or 707270; abl . and gen.

70072 2720or 7072j o ; loc., 70072 272 7 or 7072j 2'

.

‘

Why do we specify these casesBecause we have in nom . sing , 700720, aec. sing , 700720720772 , and acc. plur.707270by Sutras 3 , 9 .

E TWA S T tiNA M .

1 72 720772 is used for 77200, the affix of the indecl . past participle as,

7 I o 0Datunam fo7 datwa, havm g gi ven, ’ etc.

HRIDA YA SYA HI T A A K A M .

77270070is used for the word 727 2'270y0, the heart as,

Hitaakam barasi m e taluni, Maiden, thou ravishest m y heart.’

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

1 80 TH E P RAK R I T A PRA [s eer x1 .

H RIDA YA SYA HA DA K K A H .

H0c70770i s substituted for the heart as,

H adakke alale m am a, respect in m y heart ’

(P

RYA RJA YOR YYA H .

Yy i s substituted for 70and 7j : as,

K ayye, duyyane f07 karyam ,to be done, ’ durj anah, wicked .’

K SHA SYA SKA H .

S7 is substituted for 7872 as,

L askaée, daska for rakshasah,

‘

a dem on, ’ dakshah,‘clever.

’

A SMA DA S SA U H A KE H A GE A H A RE .

F or08 772007, followed by the nom . affix 8 22 , 72070, 72000and 072070are

substituted : as,

H ake, hage, 07 abake bhanam i,I speak .

’

A T A I DE T A U LUK CHA .

S 22 is continued from Sat. 9 . When 8 72 foll ows a noun ending in 0, 2'

and

0are substituted ; el ision of the affix is al so optionally allowed : as,

1 o 1 0, j o 0

E 5 1 laa , ese pak se, esa puk sa for esha raJa , th i s k1ng,’esha purushah,

th1 s m an .

’

K TANTAD UseHA .

U i s substituted when the affix 82 2 follows a word ending with the afl‘ix

7 70; and al so (as we infer from the 0720of the Sat .) we m ay optional ly usethe 2

'

or0of the preceding Sut , or even elide the affix : as

Hasidu07 basidi,haéide

,haéida

, f07 hasitah, sm iling.

NA SO HO v.71 DIRGHA TWA MCHA .

H0is optionally substi tuted for 7208 , the affix of the gen . sing ,and

at the sam e tim e the preceding vowel is lengthened : as,

IPuli z

’

saha 07 pulisassa dhane f07 purushasya dhanam , the m an’s wealth .

’

AD iRGHA s SA MBUDDHA U .

When the affix 8 22 foll ows a noun ending in 0, in the sense of the vocati ve, the 0is lengthened : as,

Pulisé. agachchha, A pproach, oh m an .

’ Why do we say in the sense of

the vocative r Com pare Vam hanassa dhane,the brahm an

’s wealth .

’

CHI T TH A SYA CH I SHTHA H .

( 7727872 7720i s the Magadh i’ substitution for (72 777720

, the Sauraseni form of

sner . X L ] or VA R A RU CH I . 1 8 1

872 7720, ‘to stand : as,

Pulise chishthadi,‘

the m an stands.’

K RINMR INGA MAM K T A SYA DA H . ( 1 5 )

D0i s substituted for the affix 770in the verbs 77 2° to do , ’ 707 7to die

,

’

yam (g0772 77 7 ) , to go as,

Kade,m ade, gade for kritah,

‘done m ritah, dead ’

; gatah , gone .

’

RTWO DANI H .

D007 is substituted for the affix 77200as,

2 2Sah1dan1 gade, after havm g borne i t, he went ; ’ kar1dan1 aada, afterhaving done it, he cam e .

’

S'

RI GAL A SYA SIALASI ALESI A'

L A K AH . ( 1 7 )

F or 37 719070, a jackal , ’ we have these three substitutesSim Siale, éidlake .

[A s the Magadhi dialect is of considerable interest, I have added thefollowing abridgem ent of H em a-chandra’s corresponding Sutras : whichim m ediately follow those on the Sauraseni : Of. A pp . C.

2 8 7 . A 7007 802 2 2 72 772 87 7720000700772 [0f. Var. xi .

2 8 8 . 130807 70802 2 [0f. Var. xi .

2 89 . S7208072 80772y0g08097 7872 7720,with Com m ., the dental 8 is substituted

for 8 and 872 in a conjunct, except in the word 97 78727720( thus revoking the rulecorresponding to Vararuchi , iii . 1 ) as, 7208 77, 32 2 870772 , 7208 70772 [ 8 20] but9 272 2720 g7 28727720.

2 90. T 70872 7720y072 87072 .i

T he cerebral 7 j oined to the dental 8,i s used

for 77 and 872 772 : as,07208 70for0720770, 70870for 70872 7720772 , 82 2 872 2 for 1

2 9 1 . S 77207 7720y072 8 7072 ; with ex. 2 2008 72770 08700077 [07 77200072’ F] [T he writing of 7 7720in the MSS . is doubtful ]

2 9 2 . J027y0y0772 y072 . Y is substituted for j and 27g , and an initial ydoe s not becom e j [0f. Var. ii . as

, (00720272, v2'yy0, etc.

This rem arkable Sutra i s borne out by the MSS . of the Mrichchha

katika [0f. Stenz lcr, p1 c ,faee] which however have the palatal sibilant , but

in Prinscp’

s Girnai I nscription [Bengal A s. Soc. Journal, vol . vii . p . 2 78 ]

we find the dental as above.

18 2 THE PRA K R I T A PRA K A'

SA [seer x1 .

2 93 . Ny0-0y0y720-77j077207072 .2 94. V704

'07 j072 ; with ex .007270277 0707077, he goes .’

2 95 . 07272080080720’7202702 2 with ex., 9080720 772 23072 22 277

2 96 . E 8708?” 87072 . [0f. Var. xi. 8 ; the 870i s here written with thej 772 200m 2

'2 7700.]

2 97 . S707 7 707870070787072 [this 870is 7207 written with the j 772 200with ex. 770870277 10707872070, and00720870277 007207872070.

2 98 . 1 7872 772080727872 772072 1 with ex.0727872 772007 [ 2171Var. xi .

2 99 . 24007 7200007208027072072 2 [0f. Var. xi .

300. 21772027072000; with ex. 8aya72 d720or 8000720720772 .301 . A 7002 72090[qfi Var. xi .

302 . Seg lmm 8007080727007 [0f. Var. xi .m a t-o n n w-N

1 One MS . has 87270for 872 7720.2 This 27 i s m erely an ‘

77’or gram m atical technicali ty, and is added to

an affix, to im ply that the word which is to receive the affix m ust drop itsfinal vowel and any consonant which m ay follow it ; of. Pénini, vi ., 4, 143 .

Vararuchi never uses this sign.

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

1 84 THE PR A/

K R IT A PR A K A’

S’

A [se er x1 1 .

002 77720 872 7720, as 072 2 7772002 [0f. vi . 6 3 , xi .8 2 2 222000i s the prose form for 8 2 2 2 22 ; the other form in viii . 1 8 is

poetical .

Of. v . 14, Var. L ect .

( 1 9 , These are conjectural . A 072072720is used in prose for theroot08 ,

i to be as, 0072072720207 08222 2 . L assen (p . 346 ) quotes from the

Sanksh. Sara 220720727202 , 0072072720077, 007207272077720or0072072720720.“A 7772 2

' is usedin prose for the root08 ,

i to be, ’ with the personal affix 7212 , i .e .,

This is conjectural ; cf. L ass . A pp .,p . 5 6 , and Sanksh. S010, 1 5 .

I f correct, i t would im ply that 8 80222 i s optionally substituted for the affix ofthe first [ 772 220] person sing . of the future

, and al so that the previous vowelm ay be lengthened : as, K 002880222 or 7 2022 780222 , for 720028720002 2 .

[ 7772 5 is the prose form for 8720, i

a wom an .

’

This allows the form 000222,we,

’

as well as the 022 2720of vi . 43 .

I f we adopt L assen’s first c onj eeture 22072 8 8 27772022 , this will refer to

vi . 2 , and prohibit the locative form in 222 222 2 from being used in prose. A s

the form in 722222 (as, 7072 2222 , etc.) is also found in prose, L assen preposes asecond conject , 22072 8 8 272 27772072 ; but as this rule onl y refers to vi . 2 , and 72 2222would still rem ain by virtue of vi . 7 , 22072 8 82777202 2 is no doubt the true reading.

T he0702022012000affixes are not used in prose ; of. L ass . p . 3 80.This Sut . i s corrupt

,but seem s to im ply that 0m ay beused before

any personal affix, as in the Méhz’

rr. by vii . 34.

This seem s to im ply that 0m ay be used for the first person of the

i m perative or potential [cf. L ass . A pp ] as 072000for072000y022 2 , but this isvery doubtful . The 0720would im ply that the com m on form [vii 1 8 m ay

be al so used .

( 30) 0f. iii . 1 8 .

I f L assen’s conjecture is correct, the form s of 1 1 . 8 5 are not usedin prose.

This S l’i t . is im portant, as fixing the nam e of the principal Prakritdialect, with which the Sauraseni so nearly agrees . A ll thsrules,i hg pfotiof Sections i r

six. equally apply to the prose or the poetical Prakrit, with

the exception of the points m entioned in this Section.

A P PEND IX 1 ) 185

A PPENDI X D .

ON P A GE 1 3 2 ( I I I .

I t has been stated in the little I ntroduction to Prakri t Gramm ar prefixedto this work

,that Prof. L assen has establ ished the principle that a long

vowel is shortened before two consonants ; with the two subsidiary rules, (0)if the long vowel be retained, one of the consonants is el ided

, and ( b ) a

short vowel before two consonants is occasionally lengthened by eliding one

of them (of. I nst . pp . 1 3 9 There can be no doubt that these are

continually confirm ed by the later Prakrit ; but how are we to account forthe fact, that Vararuchi nowhere states them in his Sfi tras ? The MS .

W has indeed a spurious Sti tra, S022 2yog0-p 2’

2 r00722 208 2000, (see A pp. A .

which,though certainly not Vararuchi

’

s, seem s to affirm the first ; yet the

Pri kri ta Sanj ivanr’

,an elaborate com m entary on Vararuchi (for an account of

which,sec preface) , never recognises it, even in explaining such a change as

that of dscharya’ to aehchhera (see note, p . Bham aha resorts to an

artifice to include a partial appl ication of ( 6 ) in i . 1 7 ; and the Sanksh.

Sara allows ( b ) in i ts 1 90th rule , 00202 2 7 72 222 70

(Lass. A pp . p . But i t is only H em a- chandra who states them clearly inthe two following rules : (Paida i . S i

’

rt . 42 ) L 2 2p 72 2 -g/0- 220-00-80-8720-8022 2 822 -8720802220721072072 wherever a y , 2

2

,0,8,872 or 8 i s el ided

,which precedes or

follows an 8, 872 , or 8 , the preceding vowel is lengthened : as, P0802 , 8780,080,etc .

,for P0831072

'

,08200, 1

02 2 87200, etc .

’— (Péda ii . S li t. 90) .N0dim/202 208 2002207 (which follows a S li t. corresponding to Var. iii. 50

,

i

the doubling previously enj oined [cf. Var. iii . 50] is forbidden ( 1f702‘ 0longvowel or an anuswa

’

rra [for the latter, cf. Var. iii . whether these havebeen introduced by previous rules [7072 872002700] or are the origi nal letters ofthe word [0707872002720] as 22 78080for 22 2820080(where the 2 is lengthened byH em a-chandra’s rule quoted above) ; 78070for 7820000(where the 7 is originally

186 THE PRA K R I T A PRA K A S‘I

A

l ong) , and sim ilarly 1772 7780, 1008022 2 for and 32022 8200}etc. Bham aha bythe exam ples given in his com m entary on Vararuchi iii . 5 8 , would seem toinclude such words under it but surely if Vararuchi had intended this ruleto exercise such a wide influence , he would have expressed him self m oreclearly

,and would have specified the class by a better denom ination than

800002, as he had before done in a sim ilar case in i . 20by 702 200—00p0872 2 2,which at once defines the class of words to which it appl ies ; see Com m ent.

,

0070022 22 2 . Nor i s there any reason, if such a principle had been recognisedby him , for his inserting such a Sfitra as viii . 46 , as the words thereinspecified would have at once com e w ithin its influence, without needing any

further rem ark. A re we therefore to interpret the silence of Vararuchi as

evidence that the principle in question grew up gradually in Prakrit, andonly becam e fully recognised in later tim es ?

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

188 l ’R A K R l T A PRA K AiSA

INDE X or PRA K RI T WORDS

OCCURRING I N THE FOREGOING PA GE S.l

A ( at )

A 1 ayi, ix . 1 2 (not

A nsr'i a’

sru, iv. 1 5 (for gender, of.

note p .A nso ansah, iv.14A kko arkab , ii . 1 . iii . 3 .

A ggi aguib (v . 14-1 8 . vi. 60, 6 1 .

A ggho arghah, i i. 1 .

A nkuso ankuéah, ii . 43 .

Anko ankah, iv. 1 7A nkollo ankothah, 1 1 . 2 5 (Sans .022007072 P

)A ngul i anguri, 1 1 . 30.A chchha as xii . 1 9A chchham akshi

,iv. 1 2 , 20.

A chchhi akshi, iii. 30. iv. 20.A chchhariam fiécharyam ,

xii. 30.(8022 23 )

A chchheram zischaryam ,i . 5 . iii .

1 8 , 40.

I

I

II

l

l

ansah, iv. 14.

A s this I ndex is intended to com prise chiefly the 2 28ef2 2 l Prékrit words,I have not always inserted those Prékrit exam ples which only reproduce theSanskri t form s unaltered ; and al so in cases of nom inal and pronom inalinflexions, I have often contented m yself wi th a single general reference.Wherever the Prékrit form differs in gender from the Sanskrit, I havenoticed the discrepancy .

A jaso ayaéas, 1 1 . 2 .

A jja aho, ix . 1 7 ( airya 02 ' adyaA jjhao adhyayah, iii . 2 8 .

A tthi asthi iii . 1 1,5 1 .

anuvartam z’

m a,iv .5 .

A nnahavaanam anyatha’

rvachanam,

i . 14.A tulam atulam ,

1 1 . 2 .

A ttai , atténo atm an,v .46

A tto értah, iii . 24.A tthi asti

,xii . 20

A

t

ddha, addhéno adhwz'

r, v . 47 .

A dhi’

ro adhirah, ii . 2 7 .A pa

’

rro apzi rah, ii . 2 .

A ppé,

-

appz'

1 no zi tm é, v.45,46 .

A ppullam zi tm i'

yam ,iv. 2 5 .

A mu asau vi . 2 3 .

A m bam am ram,iii. 5 3 (0f. note

A m so

I N DEX .

A m ha ,A m hanam ,

asm z

’

rkam , vi . 5 1 .

A m he ,

A m he vayam ,asm z

'

rn,vi . 43 .

A m hehim ,etc . asm ébhih, etc, vi .

47 , 49 , 5 3 .

A riho arbah , iii . 6 2 .

A re , p article, ix . 1 5 .

A léhi alam , ix. 1 1 .

A liam ah'

kam , i . 1 8 .

A lba'

rdo ahladah,iii . 8 .

A vakkha i pasyati , viii . 6 9 .

A vaj alam apaj alam ,ii . 2 .

A varanho apar-Ahnah, iii . 8 .

A vari upari,i . 2 2 .

A vavésa i avakésatc , viii . 3 5 .

A vavaha‘

i avagz'

rhate,vii i. 34.

A vahara‘

i’

avaharati , iv. 1 3 .

A vahz’

rso avahz’

rsah,iv. 2 1 .

A vahovésam ubhayapéréwam ,iv.

3 3 .

A vasaria zn apasri tam ,iv . 2 1

A vvo aho, ix . 10(07. L ass . p .

A sivam,asivvam afsivam , iii . 5 8 .

A su, asum iv. 1 6 800asu, 22 2fr0.A so (or rather 0i . 2 ) a

’

swah,

ii i . 5 8 .

A ssa, assim asya, asm in, vi . 1 5 -1 7 .

A sso a’

swah,i . 2 . ii i. 5 8 .

A ha asau, adas, vi . 24.A baam aham

,vi . 40.

A hake aham (M00) , xi . 9 .

A ham aham, vi . 40.

A ham m i aham ,m ém , vi . 41 .

A hijéi abhij zi tih ,i . 2 .

A l i im ajj r'

r abhim anyuh, iii . 1 7 .

A himunko abhim uktah, iv. 1 5 .

II

II

II

II

I

I

idam,vi . 1 8 .

189

5» ( a n)

Aado égatah, 1 1 . 7 .

2 1211 515 2 2111 , ii . 7 .

A udi avritih, i i . 7 .

Anatti ajnaptih, iii . 5 5 .

And ajna, iii . 5 5 .

Anélakkham bho, zi lz’

rnastam bhah ,

Anélakham bho, iii . 5 7 . iv . 2 9 .

Adaro édarah,1 1 . 2 .

Apelo épidah, i . 1 9 .

Am elo épidah, ii . 1 6 .

”

gum évartah,iii . 24.

Asi 8 5 1 2,vi i . 2 5 .

A se aswah, i . 2 . ( 1 1 1 . 5 8

Asu,ésum {rsu (0022j007. ) iv. 1 6 .

A hijéi abhij e’

rtih, i . 2 .

I ( i )

I a iti,i . 14.

I arassim ,etc . i tarasm in, vi . 2 .

I ngailo angérah, i . 3 . ii . 30.I ngiajjo ingitajnah, 1 1 1 . 5 .

I ngianno ingitajnah, xii . 8 . ( 280220)I nam

I nam

I damI tthi stri

,x1 i . 2 2 . (8000)

I m a idam (crude form ) , vi. 14,1 5 , 1 6 .

I m iné, im ena anena, vi . 3 , 14.I m esim eshém , ésém ,

vi . 4.I si ( isi ishat, i . 3 .

I si rishih,i . 2 8 .

I ssare iéwarah, 1 1 1 . 5 8 .

I ha idam (700. vi . 1 6,1 7 .

190 PR

'

A K R i T A PRA K A

'

s

'

A

I ( i )

irshévén, iv. 2 5 .

iéwarah, iii . 5 8 .

U ( 3 )

Us , uaha paéya, pasyata, i . 14

(of. transl . note) .Ukke

'

r ul ké, iii . 3 .

Ukkero utkarah, i . 5 .

Ukkhaam ,ukkhé utkhétam , i . 10.

Uehchhz'

i uksha, iii . 30.Uchchhitto utkshiptah, iii . 30.Uchchhr

'

i ikshuh, i . 1 5 . iii . 30.Ujjuo rijuh (rijukah) , iii . 5 2 .

uttariyam , ii. 1 7 .

Ud1’

1 rituh, i . 2 9 . ii . 7Uddhum éi uddham ati , V1 11 . 3 2 .

Uppalam utpalam , iii . 1 .

Uppéo utpétah, iii . l

Ubbhavai udbhavati , V1 1 1 . 3 .

Um baram udum baram , iv. 2 .

Um hé ushm a’

r,iii . 3 2 .

Ul avo ul apah, ii . 1 5 .

U'

lr'

lhalam ulrikhalam ,i . 2 1 .

v iva’

i udvij ate, viii . 43 .

v ella’

i udveshtate, viii . 41 .

Uvasaggo upasargah, ii . 1 5 .

Ussavo utsavah, iii . 42 . (0f. v .l .

Ussuo utsukah, iii. 42 .

E . ( 11 )

eva, iv . 5 .

ekam ,iii . 5 8 evam ,

iv. 5 .

l

l

l

l

eteshém , etésam , vi .4.

I

I

E frraha ekédasa, 1 1 . 14, 44.E kkam ekam ,

iii . 5 8 .

E nhim idz’

rm’

m,iv. 3 3 .

E ttiam ,évat, iv . 2 5

, Com m .

E ddaha A pp. B .)E tto etasm ét, vi . 20, 2 1 .

E ttha etasm in, vi . 2 1 (or ratheratra cf. L ass . p .

E dam etad, enam , vi . 2 2 .

E diné, cdena etena, vi . 3 .

E desim ,

E déna,

E dénam ,

E révano airzi vatah, i . 3 5 . 1 1 . 1 1 .

E rise idriéah, i. 1 9, 3 1 .

E vva eva , iv. 5 .

E sa, ssl , ese eshah,xi . 10. (M00)

E sa, eso eshah, vi . 1 9 , 2 2 .

0( ssh )

Okkhalam ul l'

ikhalam ,i . 2 1 .

Ovaha'

i'

avagz’

rhate , viii . 34.Ovésai

’

avakésate, viii . 3 5 .

Oszi riam apaséritam ,iv . 2 1 .

Obase avahasah, iv. 2 1 .

K ( a?)

Kaam kritam,i . 2 7 . v . 2 3 (cf.nofc)

Ra’

iavo kaitavah ( P) , i . .3 6 .

karat kadé, vi . 8 .

K ai kapih, ii . 2 .

K aiirao kauravah, i . 42 .

K aiisalo kausalarn i . 42 .

K achcham karyam , x . 1 1 . (P02 8 )K anj z

'

r kanyé, x . 10. (P2 2 28)K anjaé kanyaké, xii . 7 . (780220)

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

PRA'

K R rT A PRA k X éA

K eriso kidri sah, i . 1 9 ; of. i . 3 1 .K elaso kail z

’

rsah, i . 3 5 .

K evattao kaivartakah, iii . 2 2 .

Kesim keshém ,k-c

’

rsfxm , vi . 4.

K ottim am kuttim am , i . 20.K otthuho kaustubhah, i .41 iii .Kom ui kaumudi

'

, i . 41 .

Kosam bi kauéém b i’

, i . 41 .

K osalo kauéalam i . 42 .

K khu khalu, ix . 6 .

K b .

K ha i am khéditam ,i . 10.

K haggo khadgah, iii . 1 .

Khanam kshanam ,iii . 3 1 .

Khado khsatah, iii . 2 9 .

Khando skandeih, iii . 2 9 .

K handho skandhah, iii . 2 9 .

Kham a ksham é, ii i . 3 1 kshm z’

r

iii . 6 3 .

K ham bho stam bhah, iii . 14, 50.K haliam skhalitam

, iii . 1 , 50.K hé khéd viii . 2 7 .

K héiam khaditam,i . 10.

K hém i sthénuh, iii . 1 5 .

K hujjo kubjah, ii. 34K huppa m asj V1 11 . 6 8 .

K hodao sphotakah, iii . 1 6 .

G »

Gaé gadé, ii. 2 .

Gaiiravam gauravam ,i . 43 .

Gao gajah , ii . 2 .

Gaggaro gadgadah, 1 1 . 13 .

Gachchham gam i shyém i, vii .

Gade gatah, xi . 1 5 . (M00)

1

!

II

gam yatc, vii . 9 . viii . 5 8 .

Gaddo gartah, 1 1 1 . 2 5 .

Gaddaho gardabhah, 1 1 1 . 2 6 .

Gadua gatwa, xii . 10. (S022 r . )

Gabbhinam garbhitam , ii . 10.Gam m a

'

i'

,

Gam ijj a‘

i ,

Gam ia‘

r‘

,

Garibe garhah , 1 11 . 6 2 .

Garuam , guru, gurvi , i . 2 2Garui, iii .Gahavai grihapatih, iv . 3 2Gahijja

'

i , géhi grihyate, V1 1 1 . 6 1 .

Gahiram gabhi'

ram , i . 1 8 .

Gz'

r, gzi a gai viii. 2 5 . 2 6 .

Géravam gauravam , i . 43 .

(15115 géthé, ii . 2 7 .

Gitthi grishtih, i. 2 8 .

Giddho gridhrah, xii . 6 (780220) F

Gim ho grishm ah, iii . 3 2 .

Gira gir, iv. 8 .

Gunthi = grishtih, iv. 1 5 .

Gujjhao guhyakah, iii . 2 8 .

Genba grah viii . 1 5 z gri‘

hana,ix . 2 .

Gotthi goshthi, 1 11 . 1 .

Gol z’

x godavari, iv. 3 3 .

Gh~( a )Ghanzi ghriné, i . 2 7 .

Gharam griham ,iv. 3 2 , 3 3 .

Ghe grab viii . 1 6Ghe

Ghel'

ina grihit i , iv . 2 3 .

Ghettavvam grahitavyam ,V1 1 1 . 1 6 .

Ghettr'

ina grihitwé, viii . 1 6 (07.note,

I NDEX .

Ghett i'

inam grihitw-fr, x . 1 3 . (P028 )

Ghola ghuna (2007) viii . 6 .

Ch. ( 3 )

Cha i tto chaitrah, i . 3 6 .

Cha ii tthi'

chaturtln’

, i . 9Chaiiddaha chaturdasa, 1 1 . 14.

Chaii ddahi'

chaturdafs i'

,i . 9 .

Chadu,chzidu chai tu, i . 10.

Chatunham (chauuham chatur

n zim ,vi . 59 .

chatwarah, chaturah,

vi . 5 8 .

Chandim a’

r chandrik zi,ii . 6 .

Chando,chandro chandrah

,iii . 4.

Cham aram , ehz'

r cham aram ,i . 10.

Cham pa’

i charchayati, viii . 6 5 .

Chalai’ , chall a'

i' chalati, viii . 5 3 .

Chalano charanah, ii . 30.Chétuliam chéturyam , iv. 3 3 .

Chittha 511 2 115,xii . 1 6 cf.

vi . 6 3 . xi . 14.Chinai’ chinoti , viii . 2 9 .

Chindham ,II chihnam ,

i . 1 2 . iii .34.

Childdo kirr'

i tah, ii . 30, 3 3 .

Chishtha shthé, xi . 14. (M00)Chihuro chikurah

,ii . 4.

Chum va 1 ( -ba‘

1'

chum bati,viii . 7 1 .

Chotthi, chaturthi'

, chaturdafsf,

Choddahi’ i . 9 of. ii . 44.

Choriam chauryam ,iii . 20.

Chh. ( a )

Chhatthi’

shashthi’

,ii. 41 .

Chhanam kshanam ( kshanah F) ,iii . 3 1 .

I

I

II

[I

l

l

19

Chhattavanno saptaparnah, 1 1 . 41 .

Chham é ksham a’

r,iii . 3 1 .

Chham m uho shanmukhah,1 1 . 41 .

Chhéram kshéram ,iii . 30.

Chhci vao saivakah, ii 41 .

Chha'

ihzi , -i chhz'

iy zi , 1 1 . 1 8 . v . 24.Chhinda i chhinatti, viii . 3 8 .

Chhiram kshiram,iii . 30.

Chhnam kshutam,iii. 30.

Chhunn o kshunnah, iii . 30.Chhuddho kshubdhah, iii. 30.Chhuram kshurah iii . 30.Chhettam kshetram , iii . 30.

J (a )

Jaz’

i, j a 1 z : yadz

'

r,i . l l

Ja’

ié, 070. yad'

c

'

r,vi . 8 .

Jaiinaad

yam una tatam ,i v . 1 .

Jauné yam una,1 1 . 3 .

Jakkho yakshah, ii . 3 1 . 1 1 1 . 2 9,5 1 .

7 8 i yajnah, xii. 7 . (802m )Jatthi yashtih, ii . 3 1 . (cf.note, tr. )Jadharam j atharani, ii . 24.Jannao janakah , iii . 5 2 .

Jann o z . yajnah, iii . 44.

Janhi'

i j ahnuh, iii . 3 3 .

Jatto , jade yasm zi t, v i . 9 .

Jam pa'

i'

j alpati , viii. 24.Jam bhéa i jrim bhate, viii . 14.Jam m e jaam a, iii . 43 . iv. 1 8 .

Jase yaéas, ii . 3 1 . iv. 6 , 1 8 .

Jaha, jaha yathé, i . 10.Jahano -nam P) jaghanam

ii . 2 7 .

Jahitthilo yudhishthirah, i . 2 2 .

i i . 30.

19 1

Ja’

i ya'

w at,iv. 5 .

Jai na jna viii . 2 3 .

Jfim -{rue j e’

rm zitrikah,i . 2 9 .

Jém zi z'

r,

-aro j rim z'

i tz'

i,v . 3 5 .

Jaiva yavat,iv . 5 .

Jésa yasya , vi . 5 .

Jahe yada, vi . 8 .

Jina j i viii . 5 6 , 5 7 .

Jinzi yena, vi . 3 .

Jivva i j iyate , viii . 5 7 (0f. vii . 9 )Jisszi

,070. yasyz

’

rh,vi . 6 .

Jr’

am Jivitam ,ii . 2 . iv. 5 .

Jii, j 1

’

c ,070. yasyah, vi . 6 (cf. v . 2 2 )Jia jyé, iii . 6 6 .

Jiviam j ivitam , iv. 5 .

Jiha j ihwa, i . 1 7 . iii . 54.Jujjha i yudhyate, viii . 48 .

Juguchchl ia jugupsé, iii . 40.Juggam yugm am ,

iii . 2 .

Juvz'

i, juvano yuvz

’

i,v . 47 .

Ji’

i ra krudh viii . 64.Jettiam

, yévat, iv. 2 5 (of. A pp .

Jeddaham B . )Jevva eva,

'

xii . 2 3 . ( 8022 2 3 )Joggo yogyah,

iii . 2 .

Jovanavanto yauvanavén,iv. 2 5 .

Jovvanam z yauvanam ,i .41 . iii . 5 2 .

Jh ( s! )

Jhé, jhéa dhyai viii . 2 5,2 6 .

Jhijja kshi viii . 3 7 .

T h. ( 3 )

Tb z'i , thzia shthé viii . 2 5,2 6 .

Thiam stli itam, v . 1 3

,2 2 .

H

I

I

I ) . ( g )

Dando (landah,i i . 3 5 (0f. xi i .

Dasano daéanah,11 . 3 5 .

Dolr'

t dolai , ii . 3 5 (cf. x1 1 .

N . ( m )

Naanam nayanam ,1 1 . 2 .

Naaram nagaram ,ii . 2 .

Na'

i’

ggzi m o nadigra’

rm ah,1 1 1 . 5 7 .

Na'

isotto nadiérotas,iv . 1 (cf. iii . 5 2 )

Nai nadi, ii .42 . v . 1 9-2 2,2 9 . vi . 60.

Na i’

gém o nadigrém ah,iii . 5 7 .

Naisotto nadisrotas,iv . 1 .

Naiilam nakulam,ii . 2 .

Nakkho nakhab,

Naggo nagnah ,iii . 2 .

Naehcha i nrityati, viii . 47 .

Nattao, -i nartakah, -k 1’

, ii1 . 2 2 .

Nado natah,ii . 20.

Navara kevala, ix . 7 .

Navari, 1202 72070, ix. 8 .

Navi na api , ix . 1 6 .

Naham nabbas, iv. 6 , 19 .

Naho nakhab,iii . 5 8 .

I

ahalo léhalah (P) , 11 . 40; of.

var. lect . and note, transl .Niaehchha ( P) viii . 6 9 ; 0f.

note, transl . and v . 2 .

Nichcham ni tyam ,iii . 2 7 .

Nijjharo nii j harah, iii . 5 1 .

Nit thuro nishthurah,iii . 1 .

Nidz’

i lam lalétam (Sans .iv. 3 3 .

N iddz'

i nidrz'

i,i . 1 2 .

N iddél i’

i nidrz'

i v z'

m,iv . 2 5 .

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

196 PRA K R l ’

l‘

A I-‘R A K A'

sA

T erali o trayodasah, i . 5 .

T eloam , trailokyam , i . 3 5 .

T ellokkam iii . 5 8 .

T esim teshzim ,tzi saim , vi . 4.

To,tatto tasm z

’

i t,vi . 10.

Tondam tundah (WI i . 20.T ti iti

,i . 14(of. A pp. A ,

T h ( 2 1 )

Thavao stavakah, iii. 1 2 , 50.T hém

’

i sthénuh iii . 1 5 .

T him pa trip viii . 2 2 .

Thui stutih, iii. 1 2 .

11

Da i chcho daityah, i . 3 6Da

’

i'

vam daivam,i . 3 7 . 1 1 1

,5 8 .

Da‘

issam dz’

rsyém i , xii . 14. (802 2 2 )Dansanam daréanam

,iv. 1 5 .

Dachchham drakshyém i , vii . 1 6 .

Dachchho dakshah, iii. 30.Dattham dashtam 02 drishtam

,

iv. 1 2 .

Davaggi dévégnih, i . 10.Dasam uho dasam ukhah, ii . 45 .

Dasaraho dasarathah, ii 45 .

Dasavalo dasabalah, 1 1 .45 .

Daha da'sa, ii. 44.Dahamuho dasamukhah

,ii. 45 .

Daharaho dasarathah, ii . 45 .

Dahavalo daéabalah, ii. 45 .

Dahim dadhi,v . 2 5

,30.

Dashe dakshah,xi . 8 (M00)

Dér’

ina datwé, iv. 2 3 .

Dédim am dédim am,ii . 2 3 .

Dz'

idhz'

i danshtré, iv. 3 3 .

II

devastutih,

Dzi ti'

m am datwa, x . 1 3 (P02 8 )Délim am dédim am ,

ii . 2 3 .

Dévaggi dzi va’

ignih, i . 10.Déham désyém i , vii. 1 6 .

Diaro devarah, i . 34.Diaho divasah

,ii. 2 , 46 .

Diggham d i'rgham ,iii . 5 8

Di tthi drishtih,i . 2 8 . 1 1 1 . 10,

50,5 1 .

Dinh am dattam ,V11 1 . 6 2 .

Disz'

r d1 s,iv . 1 1

Dili am dirgham ,111 . 5 8 .

Duallam,duii lam dukr

’

i lam,i . 2 5 .

Duiam dwitiyam ,i . 1 8 .

Dukkhio z duhkhitah,iii . 5 8 .

Duyyane durj anah, xi . 7 (M00)Duve dwan

,Vi . 5 7 .

Duvvério dauvérikah, i . 44.Duhz

’

riam,duhéijj ai

'

dwidhz’

rkri

tam,dwidhékriyate, i . 1 6 .

Duhio duhkhitah, iii . 5 8 .

D1’

1m a’

1’

dunoti,viii. 8 .

De te (tava) , twayz’

r vi . 3 2 .

(1251,xii . 14(802 2 2 2 )

Dearo devarah, i . 34Devatthui

’

, devathui,

iii . 5 7 .

Devvam daivam,i. 3 7 . 1 1 1 . 5 8 .

Dehi dehi, vi . 64.

Do,doni dwan, Vi . 5 7 .

Donham dwayoh, vi . 5 9 .

Dohéiam,dohéijjai

‘

dwidhékritam ,

dwidhz’

rkriyate, i . 1 6 .

Dohim, etc.

Dohalo dohadam ii . 1 2 (of.

transl . , note) .Doho , drobo drohah

,1 1 1 . 4.

a r

DE X . 194

Padi prati, cf. ii . 8 , note, transl .lPadinsudam pratiérutam ,

iv. 1 5 .

Padivazi,padi pratipad, i . 2 . iv. 7 .

Padivaddi’

pratipattih, ii . 7 (cf.

transl . note) .Padi saro pratisarah, ii . 8 .

Padisiddhi'

,padi p ratisparddhin,

i . 2 . iii . 3 7 ; 0f. note, p . 108 .

Padham o pratham ah, ii . 2 8 .

Pannaraho panchadasah, iii . 44.Pann zi sé panchaéat, iii . 44.Banhai

,-h0 praénah, iii . 3 3 . iv. 20.

Panhudam prasnutam ,ii i. 3 3 .

Pattharo, -tharo prastérah, i . 10.Pabhava

’

r’

prabhavati viii . 3 .

Pam ill a‘

i'

, pram i lati,vii i . 54.

Pam ho pakshm an,iii . 3 2 .

Parahuo parabhritah, i . 2 9 .

Paribbava i paribhavati , vi ii . 3 .

Palanghano pralanghanah, ii . 2 7 .Palittam pradiptam ,

ii . 1 2 .

Pall attham paryastam ,iii . 2 1 .

Pallanam paryénam ,iii . 2 1 .

Pavattho prakoshth'

ah,i . 40.

pavanoddhatam ,

iv. 1,

note transl .Pasuttam , pé prasuptam ,

i . 2 .

Pasiddhi, pé prasiddhih, i . 2 .

Paharo, pahéro prahérah, i . 10.Paho pathin

,i . 1 3 .

Pei , péa ghrzi viii . 20.Paavadanam pédapatanam ,

iv. 1(of. note transl .)

Péuam prékritam , i . 10.Péuso pr2

’

1 vrish, iv. 1 1 , 1 8 .

Padisiddhi pratisparddhin, i . 2 .

i ii . 3 7 .

198 -\ K A SA

Pzina into prz'

inavat, iv. 2 5 .

Pém am paini'

yam ,i . 1 8 .

Pani c , pz'

irai vao pérzi vatah, iv . 5 .

Pélei padyate, viii 10.Pévadanam pédapatanam ,

iv. 1 .

(cf. note transl .)Pia, piaro pité, v. 3 5 .

Piz’

i piam , p ia pitépitam ,iv. 1 (

P)

Pikkam pakwam ,i . 3 . iii . 3 .

Pittham pishtam ,i . 1 2 .

Piva iva, x . 4. (P7778 .)Piam , pialam pitam ,

-alam,iv. 2 6 .

Pinattanamp inata , N . 2 2 .

Pinada ,Puttham ,

rishtham,iv . 20.

Pa tth i',p

Pudo , pudde putrah, xii . 5 (802 m )Puppham pushpam ,

iii . 3 5, 5 1 .

Puril lam paurastyam ,iv . 2 5

, com

m ent. ; 0f. A pp . B,and transl .

Puriso purushah, i . 2 3 .

Pulaa‘

i'

paéyati, vi ii . 6 9 0f. p . 1 73 .

Puli séha purushasya , xi . 1 2 (Mdg. )Puvvanho pfirvahnah,

i ii . 8 .

Puso, pa sso pushyah, iii . 5 8 .

[Query 12 72 80; 0f. A pp . D .]Bahavi pri thavi, i . 1 3 , 2 9 .

Pekkha i , pechchha‘

i‘

prekshate, v .

14, var. lect ., cf. xi i . 1 8 , and p . 1 73 .

Pettham pishtam ,i . 1 2 .

Pendam , pin pindam , i . 1 2 .

Pem m am prem an,iii . 5 2 . [Qy .

‘

pem m o’ P0f. iv. 1 8 , but in Ratn .

,

p . 2 6 , 1 2 , 2 20222 2220220]Perantam paryantam ,

i . 5 . iii . 1 8 .

II

l

l

F or words beginning with0, see under

I ’okkharo pushkarah, i . 20.Potthao pustakam 1. 20.

Ph ( tn)

Phanso sparéah, iii . 3 6 . iv. 1 5 .

Phanaso panasah, ii . 3 7Phandanam spandanam ,

1 1 1 . 3 6 .

Phariso sparsah, iii. 6 2 .

Pharuso parushah , 1 1 . 3 6 .

Phaliam patitam (P) , viii . 9 .

Phalihz’

i parikhé, ii 30, 3 6 .

Phaliho parighah, 11 . 30, 3 6 .

Phaliho sphatikah, ii .4, 2 2 .

Phuttai’

,

Phuda'

i'

sphutati , V111 . 5 3 .

E h-l

( n )

Bhaapphai vrihaspatih iv. 30.Bhai

’

ravo bhairavah,i . 3 6 .

Bhattam bhaktam ,iii . 1 .

Bhattéro bhart-ci, v . 3 1

,3 3 .

Bhaddam bhadram , iv. 1 2 .

Bham a'

i'

bhram ati , viii . 7 1 .

Bham iro bhram anasilah, iv. 24.Bhara sm ri viii . 1 8 of. p .1 6 7

Bhararup am ,

bharaniyam , 1 1 . 1 7 .

Bharam am ,

Bharaho bharatah, 1 1 . 9 .

Bha’r bhi viii . 1 9 .

Bhaanam bhz'

ijanam , iv. 4.131155, bhzi aro bhrété, v . 3 5 .

Bhanam bhaJanam , iv. 4.t iri z'i bhérya, x . 8 (P028 )

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

200 PR A

’

K R I T A PR A K ASA

M i'

idhattanam m i'

ulhatwam , iv. 2 2 .

Mfidhadzi m ridhat'fi , iv. 2 2 .

Mehalz’

i m ekhalri , ii . 2 7.

Meho m egho, ii . 2 7 .

Mckho m egho, x . 3 . (P02Mottzi m ukté, i . 20.Moro m ayr

’

rrah,i . 8 .

Moho m ayukhah, i . 8 .

Mm iva iva,ix. 1 6 .

II

II

Mhi, m ho, m hu, m ha asm i,sm ah,

vii . 7 .

R ( T )

Raanam ratnam ,iii . 60

,

Raadam raj atam ,ii . 2 , 7 .

Rachchhz'

i rathyé, ii i . 2 7 .

Rannam 1aranyam ,

i . 4.

Ranno, -nna’

r réjnah, -né, v 3 8 ,42B attam ( P) raktam ,

vii i . 6 2 .

Ratti ratrih, ii i. 5 8 .

ram aniyam ,1 1 . 1 7 .

Ram an iam,

ram yate , viii . 5 8 .

Rasi, rassi rasm ih, iii . 2 , 5 8 .

Réaiilam ,rziulam rajakulam , iv. 1 .

R771 réjé, v . 3 6 (000722200v . 3 6

Réino,-n2

’

1 raJnah,-nr

'

i,v . 3 8 , 43 .

R277 ratrih,iii . 5 8 .

Réchi réj an, x . 1 2 (P028 ) .Résaho résabhah, ii . 2 7 .

Bébé rédhé, ii . 2 7 .

1 This form continually occurs in the Prakrit songs in the 4th A ct of

the Vikram orvafsi’

.

R ichchho rikshah,i . 30. 1 1 1 . 30.

R inam rinam , i . 30.Riddho riddhah, i . 30.Rukkho vr ikshah

, i 3 2 . 1 1 1 . 3 1 .

K unnam ruditam , viii . 6 2 .

B udde,rudro, rudrah, iii . 4.

Rundha rudh ( 2007) viii . 49 .

Ituppam rukm am, 1 1 1 . 49 .

Ruppini’

rukm in i’

, iii . 49 .

Rum bha rudh viii . 49 .

Ruva rud viii . 42 .

R i'

i sa‘

i'

rushya ti , viii . 46 .

Re, 1202 72070, ix . 1 5 .

Rochchham rodishyz’

rm i,v1 1 . 1 6 .

Rottr’

m a ruditwé, viii . 5 5 .

Rosainto roshavén , iv. 2 5 .

L ( a )

L agga i lagati, V1 11 5 2 .

L achchhi lakshm i'

,iii . 30.

L atthi yashtih, ii. 3 2 (0f. notetransl ., ii .

L aska'

se ri kshasah, xi . 8 . (M00)

L ahui'

l aghwi, iii . 6 5 .

L 175 rajé, xi . 10(M00)L ichchha lipsz

'

i,1 11 . 40.

L ijjha‘

i'

lihyate, viii . 5 9 .

L una 111 viii . 5 6Luvva 1 , Iunijj a

’

i'

lriyate, V111 . 5 7 .

Lubha'

i'

m zirshti viii . 6 7 .

Lonam lavanam,i . 7 .

L oddhao lubdhakah,i . 20. 1 11 . 3 .

nnx. 201

Vam hano= bréhm anah, iii . 8Vam hzi , vam héno brahm a, v . 47 .

Vara'

i'

vrinoti, viii . 1 2 .

Valahi vadabhih, ii . 2 3 .

Valiam vyalikam ,i . 1 8 .

Vale, 2 202 2 72070, ix. 1 2 .

Vasahi vasatih, ii. 9 .

Vasaho vrishabhah, i . 2 7 . 1 1 .43 .

Vahiro badhirah, ii . 2 7 .

Vahum

Vah iv. 1 .

Vah1'

1 vadhi'

ih, v . 2 9 . vi . 60.Va

, véa m lai (0007) viii . 2 1 .

V5 21 véch, iv . 7 .

Véavadanam , 800péaV571 véyuh (000722 200v . 14— 1 8

,

2 7 . vi. 60,Véraha dwéda

’

sa, ii . 14, 44.

Vévado vyapritah, xii .4(822Véhittam vyéhritam ,

iii . 5 2 .

Vého véshpah, iii . 3 8 , 54.Via iva, ix . 3

,1 6 . xii . 24.

Viaddi vitardih, iii . 2 6 .

Viand vedané, i . 34.Viano vyaj anam i . 3 .

Vianam vit‘

énam,ii . 2 .

Viérillo, v1arullo vikz'

i ravat, iv . 2 5 .

Viinho vitrishnah, i . 2 8 .

Viudam vivritam,i . 2 9 . 1 1 . 7 .

Viulam vipulam ,i i. 2 .

Vinhiam vrinhitam,i . 2 8 .

Vikkavo viklavah, iii . 3 .

Vikkina'

i'

,

Vikkei ,

Vichchhaddi vichchhardih, iii . 2 6 .

Vijja vidyé, iii . 2 7 .

vikri'

nite, viii . 3 1 .

Vijjul i, vijj r’

r Vidyut, iv. 2 6 . iv. 9 .

202

Vinchhuo m schikah, i .1 5 , 2 8 . iii .4lVinj o vijnah, xii . 7 (5m m )

Vinjéto vijnzi tah, x . 9 (PM? )

Vinjho vindhyah, iv. 14.Vidavo vipapah, ii . 20.Vinn zi nam vijnéii am , iii . 44.Vip hi

’

l vishnuh, i . 1 2 . iii . 3 3 .

Vipphariso visparéah, iii. 5 1 , 6 2 .

Vimjho vindhyah, iv. 14.Vim hao vism ayah, iii . 3 2 .

Visa'

i (P) grasate , viii . 2 8 .

Visam visam , ii . 3 8 .

Visi vrishi, i . 2 8 .

Visfi m khid (root) , viii. 6 3 .

Visséso viéwésah, iii . 5 8 .

Vihalo vihwalah, iii.47 .

Vi’riam viryam , iii. 20.Visattho viéwastah, i . 1 7 .

Visam bho viéram bhah, i . 1 7 .

Viséso Vl swésah, iii . 5 8 .

Viha g ibb i (root) , vi ii . 1 9 .

Vujjha i budhyate, viii . 48VHFta

'

l'

m ajj ati , viii. 6 8 .

Vuttanto vritténtah, i . 2 9 .

Vundévanam vrindévanam ,i . 2 9 .

Vea

Veané vedané, i . 34; of. iv . 1 .

eva , ix . 3 .

Vechchham vetsyém i , vi i . 1 6 .

Vejjam vaidyam ,iii . 2 7 .

Vediso vetasah, i . 8 . ii . 8 .

Veddha’

i'

veshiate, viii .40.Venhi

'

i vi shnuh, i. 1 2 .

Vetti'

m a viditwé, fi ii . 5 5 .

Vebbhalo vihwal ah, iii .47.Veluriam vaidfiryam ,

iv. 3 3 .

PRAK R i T A PRA K A s'

A

Velli vallih, i . 5 .

V0 vah,vi . 2 9 , 3 7 .

Vochchham

Vot am badaram , i . 6 .

vrindam , iv. 2 7 ; cf. iii .4.

vakshyzi m i , vn . 1 6 .

Vrandam

s ( a )

sodhwé, xi . 1 6 (fll dy )éi

'igélah, xi . 1 7 (Mdg )

8 ( 11 )

Saadho éaka'gah, ii . 2 1 .

Saahuttam éatakritwas, iv. 2 5 (cf.

A pp. B . )8 3 5 , sax sadzi , i . 1 1 .

Sa’

iram swairam , i . 3 6 .

Sam vattao sam vartakab , iii . 24.Sam vudam sam vxjitam , i . 2 9 .

Sam vudi’

sam vritih, ii . 7sam vesh

‘

gate, v m . 41 .

sankréntah, iii . 5 6 .

Sanké éankzi , iv . 1 7 .

Sakka éak (root) , viii. 5 2 .

Sakko éakrah, iii . 3Sachévam sachz

'

i pam ,n . 2 .

Sam vell a i

Sankanto

Sajjo shagijah, iii. 1 .

Sanj ado sam yatah, ii. 7 .

Sanj édo sam yétah, ii . 7 .

Sadh'

c

'

i saga, ii. 2 1 .

Sagla. éad (root) viii. 5 1 .

Saneho snehah,iii . 64.

Santhansthépitam i 10

San'gh

Sandho shap dhah, ii, 43 .

Sanne'

i‘

sanjné, iii . 5 5 .

1 Vz‘

nnatti vfinap tflz Would be a better exam ple ; cf. note, transl .

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

204 PRAK R I T A PR A K A’

é/i .

S iiro sfiryab , iii . 1 9 .

Sfxsa i éushyati, viii . 46 .

Se tasya, tasyéh, vi . 1 1 .

Seohcham saityam , i . 3 5 .

Sejja sayyz'

i , i . 5 . iii . 1 7 .

Sendfiram sindfiram , i . 1 2 .

Sebhalia sephélikzi , ii . 2 6 .

Seva, sevvé seva, iii . 5 8 .

Selo sailah, i . 3 5 .

S0 sah, vi . 2 2 .

Soam allam saukum aryam ,i .

iii . 2 1 .

Sofip a érutwa, iv. 2 3 .

Sochchham sroshyam i , v11 . 1 6 .

Sonha snushé, ii. 47 .

Sottam srotam , iii . 5 2 .

Som alo sukum arah,ii . 30(of. note

transl ., and E rrata p . xxxu. )Som m o saum yah, iii . 2 .

Soriam sauryam , iii . 20.Sossam sushm a

,iii . 2 . (of. iii .

H ( 3 )

H anso hraswah, iv. 1 5 .

H ake, hage aham , xi . 9 (Mdg) .Hadakke hridayam , xi. 6 (Mdg)H anum anto,

anum an, iv. 2 5 .

H anum a ,

Hattho bastah , iii. 1 2 , 50.H ado hatah, ii . 7 .

H am aham (a sm ad decl . vi .40— 5 3 .

H am m a‘

i hanti,viii. 45 .

H arisa brish (root) , viii. 1 1 .

H ariso harshah, iii . 6 2 .

H em achandra gives three form s,

ST E PHE N A UST I N , PRI N T E R , H E RT F ORD.

H aladda, haridra, i . 13 . v . 24.H aladdi

'

, (on the latter S li t. of. notetransl .)

Halio halikah , i . 10.H avim havis, v . 2 5 (of. iv.Haéidu, -di, -de, -da hasitah, xi .l l (Mdg)

H asai, basanti basanti, vu. 1 1 .

H asanto hasan, vii . 10.H asiro hasanaéilah, iv. 24.

v11 . 9 . V111 . 5 8 .

11 5110 halikah,i . 10.

H iaam hridayam ,i . 2 8 .

H itaakam hridayam , x . 14(F003 )R ittham trastam , m m . 6 2 (of. A pp .

A ,3 7

H iri hrih, 1 1 1 . 6 2 .

H ire, p a/rtz'

cl0,ix . 1 5 .

H ira‘

i hriyate, viii . 60.Huam (hfiam P) bhi

’

i tam , V1 1 1 . 2 .

Huna hu (root) , viii . 5 6 , 5 7 .

H uva bhl'

i (root) , viii . l .

Huvva i , hunijja'

i'

hfiyate , V11 1 . 5 7

E nvia abhavat, vii . 2 3 ; cf. no

transl .Huvasu bhava, ix . 2 ; cf. vn . 1 8

Ho bhi’l (root) , viii. 1 .

H OJJa, hojja bhavati , bhavishya‘

ti,

etc.,vii . 20(of. note, transl .)

Hossam ,etc. bhavishyém i , v1 i . 14.

bhavishyam ah, vi i . 1 5 .

B ob i'a abhi'

i t, vn . 24(0f.note trans .)

l n'

ttkam , taddlzam ,and tattkam .

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join